OM35768U

User Manual: 2001 Toyota 4Runner Owners Manual | SERVICE MANUAL OWNERS

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 301

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

Foreword
Welcome to the growing group of value−conscious people who drive Toyotas. We
are proud of the advanced engineering and quality construction of each vehicle we
build.
This Owner’s Manual explains the operation of your new Toyota. Please read
it thoroughly and have all the occupants follow the instructions carefully.
Doing so will help you enjoy many years of safe and trouble−free motoring.
For important information about this manual and your Toyota, read the following pages carefully.
When it comes to service, remember that your Toyota dealer knows your vehicle
best and is interested in your complete satisfaction. He will provide quality maintenance and any other assistance you may require.
Please leave this Owner’s Manual in this vehicle at the time of resale. The next
owner will need this information also.
All information and specifications in this manual are current at the time of printing.
However, because of Toyota’s policy of continual product improvement, we reserve
the right to make changes at any time without notice.
Please note that this manual applies to all models and explains all equipment,
including options. Therefore, you may find some explanations for equipment
not installed on your vehicle.

TOYOTA MOTOR CORPORATION

All rights reserved. This material may not be reproduced or copied, in whole or in
part, without the written permission of Toyota Motor Corporation.

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

Important information about this manual
Safety and vehicle damage warnings

Safety symbol

Throughout this manual, you will see safety and vehicle damage warnings. You must follow these warnings carefully to
avoid possible injury or damage.
The types of warnings, what they look like, and how they are
used in this manual are explained as follows:

CAUTION
This is a warning against something which may cause
injury to people if the warning is ignored. You are
informed about what you must or must not do in
order to avoid or reduce the risk to yourself and other
people.

When you see the safety symbol
shown above, it means: Do not...";
Do not do this"; or Do not let this
happen".

NOTICE
This is a warning against something which may cause
damage to the vehicle or its equipment if the warning
is ignored. You are informed about what you must or
must not do in order to avoid or reduce the risk of
damage to your vehicle and its equipment.

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

Important information about your Toyota

New vehicle warranty

Accessories, spare parts and
modification of your Toyota

Your new vehicle is covered by the following Toyota
limited warranties:

A wide variety of non−genuine spare parts and accessories for Toyota vehicles are currently available in the
market. You should know that Toyota does not warrant
these products and is not responsible for their performance, repair, or replacement, or for any damage they
may cause to, or adverse effect they may have on,
your Toyota vehicle.

New vehicle warranty
Emission control systems warranty
Others
For further information, please refer to the Owner’s
Warranty Information Booklet" or Owner’s Manual
Supplement".

This vehicle should not be modified with non−genuine
Toyota products. Modification with non−genuine Toyota
products could affect its performance, safety or durability, and may even violate governmental regulations. In
addition, damage or performance problems resulting from
the modification may not be covered under warranty.

Your responsibility for maintenance
It is the owner’s responsibility to make sure that the
specified maintenance is performed. Section 6 gives details of these maintenance requirements. Also included
in Section 6 is general maintenance. For scheduled
maintenance information, please refer to the Scheduled
Maintenance Guide" or Owner’s Manual Supplement".

iii

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

Spark ignition system of your
Toyota

Installation of a mobile
two−way radio system

The spark ignition system in your Toyota meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference−Causing Equipment Standard.

As the installation of a mobile two−way radio system in
your vehicle could affect electronic systems such as
multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel
injection system, traction control system (two−wheel
drive models)/active traction control system (four−wheel
drive models), vehicle skid control system, cruise control
system, anti−lock brake system, electronic throttle control system, SRS airbag system and seat belt pretensioner system, be sure to check with your Toyota dealer
for precautionary measures or special instructions regarding installation.

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

Scrapping of your Toyota

On−pavement and off−road
driving tips

The SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner devices in
your Toyota contain explosive chemicals. If the vehicle
is scrapped with the airbags and pretensioners left as
they are, it may cause an accident such as fire. Be
sure to have the systems of the SRS airbag and seat
belt pretensioner removed and disposed of by a qualified
service shop or by your Toyota dealer before you dispose of your vehicle.

This vehicle belongs to the utility vehicle class. Utility
vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than
other types of vehicles. This vehicle will handle and
maneuver differently from an ordinary passenger car because it is designed for off−road use also. In addition,
this vehicle has a higher ground clearance and center of
gravity than that of an ordinary passenger car. This
vehicle design feature causes this type of vehicle to be
more likely to rollover. Failure to operate this vehicle
correctly may result in loss of control, accidents or
vehicle rollover causing death or serious injury. Be sure
to read Off−road vehicle precautions" in Section 2 and
Off−road driving precautions" in Section 3.

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

SECTION

1− 1

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND
CONTROLS
Overview of instruments and controls
Instrument panel overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Instrument cluster overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Indicator symbols on the instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

Instrument panel overview
1. Side vents
2. Tilt steering lock release lever
3. Instrument cluster
4. Center vents
5. Garage door opener
6. Garage door opener box or auxiliary
box
7. Electric moon roof switch
8. Personal lights
9. Glove box
10. Power door lock switches
11. Power window switches
12. Automatic transmission selector lever
13. Parking brake lever
14. Ashtray
15. Cup holders
16. Front drive control lever
17. Lower vent
18. Hood lock release lever
19. Fuel filler door opener
20. Window lock switch
21. Power rear view mirror control switches
(with power windows)

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

1. Seat heater switch (for passenger)
2. Headlight and turn signal switch, and
front fog light switch
3. Wiper and washer switches
4. Back window and rear view mirror
defoggers switch
5. Driving pattern selector button
6. Clock
7. Emergency flasher switch
8. Power back window switch
9. Theft deterrent system/Engine
immobiliser system indicator light
10. Front passenger’s seat belt reminder
light
11. Air conditioning controls
12. Car audio
13. Ashtray
14. Power outlets
15. Cigarette lighter
16. OUT/T" (outside temperature) button
17. Ignition switch
18. Cruise control switch
19. Center differential lock switch
20. Instrument panel light control knob
21. Power rear view mirror control switch
(without power windows)
2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

22. Traction control off switch
23. Seat heater switch (for driver) or
Power back window lock switch

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

Instrument cluster overview

1. Service reminder indicators and
indicator lights

4. Speedometer

2. Engine coolant temperature gauge

6. Fuel gauge

7. Trip meter reset knob

5. Odometer and two trip meters

3. Tachometer

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

Indicator symbols on the instrument panel
Brake system warning light∗1
Driver’s seat belt reminder light∗1

Vehicle
system
traction
warning

skid control system and traction control
(two−wheel drive models) or active
control system (four−wheel drive models)
light∗1

Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light∗1

Open door warning light∗1

Discharge warning light∗1

SRS warning light∗1

Low oil pressure warning light∗1

Unengaged Park" warning light∗1

Malfunction indicator lamp∗1

Automatic transmission fluid temperature
warning light∗1

Low fuel level warning light∗1

Low windshield washer fluid level warning
light∗1
Turn signal indicator lights

Anti−lock brake system warning light∗1
Headlight high beam indicator light

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

Overdrive−off indicator light

Automatic transmission indicator lights

Driving pattern (PWR" mode) indicator light
Four−wheel drive and center differential lock
indicator lights
Slip indicator light
Traction control system off indicator light∗1
(two−wheel drive models)
Vehicle skid control system off indicator light∗1
(four−wheel drive models)
Cruise control indicator light∗2
∗1:
∗2:

For details, see Service reminder indicators and warning
buzzers" in Section 1−5.
If this light flashes, see Cruise control" in Section 1−6.

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

SECTION

1− 2

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND
CONTROLS
Keys and Doors
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine immobiliser system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Side doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power back window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Back door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Theft deterrent system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuel tank cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electric moon roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

10
13
14
22
24
26
28
29
31
32

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

Keys
(without engine immobiliser
system)

Your vehicle is supplied with two kinds
of keys.
1. Master keyThis key works in every
lock.
2. Sub keyThis key will not work in the
glove box.
To protect things locked in the glove box
when you have your vehicle parked, leave
the sub key with the attendant.
Since the doors can be locked without a
key, you should always carry a spare
master key in case you accidentally lock
your keys inside the vehicle.

Keys
(with engine immobiliser
system)

KEY NUMBER PLATE
Your key number is shown on the plate.
Keep the plate in a safe place such as
your wallet, not in the vehicle.
If you should lose your keys or if you
need additional keys, duplicates can be
made by a Toyota dealer using the key
number.
We recommend you to write down the key
number and keep it in safe place.

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

Your vehicle is supplied with the two
kinds of keys.
1. Master key (black)This key works in
every lock. Your Toyota dealer will
need it to make you a new key with
built−in transponder chip.
2. Sub key (gray)This key does not
work in the glove box.
A transponder chip for engine immobiliser
system has been filled in the head of the
master and sub keys. These chips are
needed to enable the system to function
correctly, so be careful not to lose these
keys. If you make your own duplicate key,
you will not be able to cancel the system
or start the engine.

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

To protect things locked in the glove box
when you have your vehicle parked, leave
the sub key with the attendant.
Since the side doors can be locked without a key, you should always carry a
spare master key in case you accidentally
lock your keys inside the vehicle.
For information on use of the wireless
remote control key, see Side doors" in
this section.

NOTICE
When using a key containing a transponder chip, observe the following
precautions:
z When starting the engine, do not
use the key with a key ring resting
on the key grip and do not press
the key ring against the key grip.
Otherwise the engine may not start,
or may stop soon after it starts.

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

z When starting the engine, do not
use the key with other transponder
keys around (including keys of other vehicles) and do not press other
key plates against the key grip.
Otherwise the engine may not start,
or may stop soon after it starts. If
this happens, remove the key once
and then insert it again after taking
off other transponder keys (including keys of other vehicles) from the
ring or while gripping or covering
them with your hand to start the
engine.

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

z Do not cover the key grip with any
material that cuts off electromagnetic waves.
z Do not knock the key hard against
other objects.
z Do not leave the key exposed to
high temperatures for a long period,
such as on the dashboard and hood
under the direct sunlight.
z Do not put the key in water or
wash it in an ultrasonic washer.

z Do not bend the key grip.

z Do not use the key with electromagnetic materials.

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

Engine immobiliser system
Inserting the registered key in the ignition
switch automatically cancels the system,
which enables the engine to start. The
indicator light will go off.
For your Toyota dealer to make you a
new key with built−in transponder chip,
your dealer will need your key number
and master key. However, there is a limit
to the number of additional keys your
Toyota dealer can make for you.
If you make your own duplicate key,
you will not be able to cancel the system or start the engine.
The engine immobiliser system is a
theft prevention system. When you insert the key in the ignition switch, the
transponder chip in the key’s head
transmits an electronic code to the vehicle. The engine will start, only when
the electronic code in the chip corresponds to the registered ID code for
the vehicle.

The system is automatically set when the
key is removed from the ignition switch.
The indicator light will start flashing to
show the system is set.
If either of the following indicator conditions occurs, contact your Toyota dealer.

The indicator light stays on except
when the theft deterrent system is setting or activating. (See Theft deterrent
system".)

NOTICE
Do not modify, remove or disassemble the engine immobiliser system. If any unauthorized changes or
modifications are made, the proper
operation of the system cannot be
guaranteed.

The indicator light does not start flashing when the key is removed from the
ignition switch.

The indicator light flashes unsteady.

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

Side doors
For vehicles sold in U.S.A.
FCC ID: MOZ RI−4BTY
MADE IN JAPAN
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

For vehicles sold in Canada
This device complies with RSS−210 of
Industry Canada. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept
any interference, including interference
that may cause undesired operation of
the device.

LOCKING AND UNLOCKING WITH KEY

CAUTION

Insert the key into the keyhole and turn
it.

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.

To lock: Turn the key forward.
To unlock: Turn the key backward.
Vehicles with power door lock system
All the doors lock and unlock simultaneously with either front door. In the driver’s door lock, turning the key once will
unlock the driver’s door and twice in succession will unlock all the doors simultaneously.

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

Driver’s side

LOCKING
AND
UNLOCKING
INSIDE LOCK BUTTON

WITH

Driver’s side

Front passenger’s side
Front passenger’s side

Move the lock button.
To lock: Push the button downward.
To unlock: Pull the button upward.
Closing the door with the lock button
pushed in will also lock the door. Be careful not to lock your keys in the vehicle.
Vehicles with power door lock systemThe front doors cannot be locked if
you leave the key in the ignition switch.

With power windows
2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

Without power windows

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

LOCKING
AND
UNLOCKING
POWER DOOR LOCK SWITCH

WITH

CAUTION

Push the switch.

Before driving, be sure that the doors
are closed and locked, especially
when small children are in the vehicle. Along with the proper use of
seat belts, locking the doors helps
prevent the driver and passengers
from being thrown out from the vehicle during an accident. It also helps
prevent the doors from being opened
unintentionally.

To lock: Push the switch on the front side.
To unlock: Push the switch on the rear
side.
All the doors lock or unlock simultaneously.
When the front side doors are locked from
the outside or locked with the wireless
remote control transmitter, the power door
lock switch will not work until either front
door is unlocked with the key, lock knob,
or wireless remote control transmitter.

REAR DOOR CHILD−PROTECTORS
Move the lock lever to the LOCK"
position as shown on the label.
This feature allows you to lock a rear
door so it can be opened from the outside
only, not from inside. We recommend using this feature whenever small children
are in the vehicle.

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

Wireless remote control
Your vehicle has a wireless remote control system that can lock or unlock all
the side doors and back door from a
distance within approximately 1 m (3
ft.) of the vehicle.
LOCKING AND UNLOCKING THE SIDE
DOORS AND BACK DOOR
To lock and unlock all the side doors
and back door, push the switches slowly and securely.

Locking operation

To lock: Push the LOCK"
side doors and back door
multaneously. At this time
be heard, and the parking
lights flash once.

switch. All the
are locked sione beep will
lights and tail

Check to see that all the side doors and
back door are securely locked.
If any of the side doors or back door is
not securely closed, locking cannot be
performed by the LOCK" switch and a
beep will sound continuously for 10 seconds. However, if the key is in the ignition, a beep will not sound.

To unlock: Push the UNLOCK" switch
once to unlock the driver’s door alone.
Pushing the switch twice within 3 seconds
unlocks all the side doors and back door
simultaneously. Each time the UNLOCK"
switch is pushed, two beeps will be heard,
and the parking lights and tail lights flash
twice.
You have 30 seconds to open a door after
using the wireless remote unlock feature.
If a door is not opened by then, all the
side doors and back door will be automatically locked again.
If the LOCK" or UNLOCK" switch is kept
pressed in, the locking or unlocking operation is not repeated. Release the button
and then push again.
The volume of beep sound can be
changed. Contact your Toyota dealer for
details if you require it.

To stop the buzzer, close all the doors
securely or push the UNLOCK" switch.

Unlocking operation
2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

WIRELESS
TRANSMITTER

REMOTE

CONTROL

The wireless remote control transmitter is
an electronic component. Observe the following instructions in order not to cause
damage to the transmitter.

Do not leave the transmitter on places
where the temperature becomes high
such as on the dashboard.

Do not disassemble it.
Avoid knocking it hard against other
objects or dropping it.
OPENING THE BACK WINDOW

PANIC" SWITCH

To open the back window, push the
back window open switch of the transmitter for about 1 second. The window
will fully open.

Pushing the PANIC" switch blows the
horn intermittently and flashes the
headlights and tail lights.

At this time, you can hear a beep.
If the ignition switch is in the ON" position, the back window cannot be opened
by the back window open switch.
To open the back window with the master
key, see Power back window" in this section.
The volume of beep sound can be
changed. Contact your Toyota dealer for
details if you require it.

The PANIC" switch is used to deter vehicle theft when you witness anyone attempting to break into or damage your
vehicle.
The alarm will last for one minute. To stop
alarm midway, push the PANIC" or
UNLOCK" switch, or unlock any side door
or back door with key. You can also stop
the alarm by turning the ignition key from
LOCK" to the ON" position.
The PANIC" mode does not work when
the ignition key is in the ON" position.
2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

Avoid putting it in water.
You can use up to 4 wireless remote control transmitters for the same vehicle.
Contact your Toyota dealer for detailed
information.

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

If the wireless remote control transmitter
does not actuate the doors or operate
from a normal distance:

Check for closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station or an
airport which can interfere with normal
operation of the transmitter.

The battery may have been consumed.
Check the battery in the transmitter. To
replace the battery, see following
REPLACING THE BATTERY".

For vehicles sold in U.S.A.
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

If you lose your wireless remote control
transmitter, contact your Toyota dealer as
soon as possible to avoid the possibility
of theft, or an accident.

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

NOTICE:
This equipment has been tested and
found to comply with the limits for a
Class B digital device, pursuant to Part
15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are
designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a
residential installation. This equipment
generates, uses and can radiate radio
frequency energy and, if not installed
and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to
radio communications. However, there is
no guarantee that interference will not
occur in a particular installation. If this
equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception,
which can be determined by turning the
equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following
measures:

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

Increase the separation between the
equipment and receiver.

Connect the equipment into an outlet
on a circuit different from that to
which the receiver is connected.

Consult the dealer or an experienced

For vehicles sold in Canada
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
(1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept
any interference, including interference
that may cause undesired operation of
the device.

REPLACING THE BATTERY
For replacement, use a lithium battery
CR2016 and a special screwdriver.

CAUTION
Special care should be taken that
small children do not swallow the removed battery or components.

radio / TV technician for help.
FCC WARNING:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.

NOTICE
When replacing the transmitter battery, be careful not to lose the components.
Replace the battery by the following procedures:

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

1. Using a coin or equivalent, open the
transmitter case.

2. Remove the discharged transmitter battery.

3. Put new transmitter battery with positive (+) side up.
Close the transmitter case securely.

NOTICE
z Make sure the positive side and
negative side of the transmitter battery should be faced correctly.
z Be careful that dust or oils do not
adhere to the transmitter case.
z Close the transmitter case securely.

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

Power windows
After replacing battery, check that the
transmitter operates properly. If the transmitter still does not operate properly, contact your Toyota dealer.

Window lock
switch

The windows can be operated with the
switch on each side door.
The power windows work when the ignition
switch is in the ON" position.

If you lose your transmitter, contact your
Toyota dealer as soon as possible to
avoid the possibility of theft, or an accident. (See If you lose your wireless remote control transmitter" in Section 4.)

Key off operation: If both front side
doors are closed, they work for 43 seconds even after the ignition switch is
turned off. They stop working when either
front side door is opened.
OPERATING THE DRIVER’S AND FRONT
PASSENGER’S WINDOWS
Driver’s door switches

Use the switches on the driver’s door
and front passenger’s door.
Normal operation: The window moves as
long as you hold the switch.
To open: Lightly push down the switch.
To close: Lightly pull up the switch.
If you push in the window lock switch on
the driver’s door, the front passengers’
window cannot be operated.

Front passenger’s door switch

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

Automatic operation: Push the switch
completely down or pull it completely up,
and then release it. The window will fully
open or close. To stop the window partway, lightly move the switch in the opposite direction and then release it.

Window
lock switch

If you push in the window lock switch on
the driver’s door, the front passengers’
window cannot be operated.
Jam protection function: During automatic closing operation, the window stops and
opens half way if something gets caught
between the window and window frame.
Driver’s door switches

If the window receives a strong impact,
this function may work even if nothing is
caught.

CAUTION

Never try jamming any part of your
body to make the jam protection
function work intentionally.

The jam protection function may
not work if something gets caught
just before the window is fully
closed.

Driver’s door switches

OPERATING THE REAR PASSENGERS’
WINDOWS
Use the switch on each rear passenger’s door or the switches on the driver’s door that control each rear passenger’s windows.
The window moves as long as you hold
the switch.
To open: Push down the switch.
To close: Pull up the switch.
If you push in the window lock switch on
the driver’s door, the rear passengers’
windows cannot be operated.

Front passenger’s door switch
2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

Power back window
CAUTION
To avoid serious personal injury, you
must do the following.

Always make sure the heads, hands
and other parts of the bodies of all
occupants are kept completely inside the vehicle before you close
the power windows. If someone’s
neck, head or hands gets caught in
a closing window, it could result in
a serious injury. When anyone
closes the power windows, make
sure that he/she operates the windows safely.

When small children are in the vehicle, never let them use the power
window switches without supervision. Use the window lock switch to
prevent them from making unexpected use of the switches.

Never leave small children alone in

Rear passengers’ door switches

the vehicle, especially with the ignition key still inserted. They could
use the power window switches and
get trapped in a window. Unattended children can be involved in
serious accidents.

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

The back window can be operated with
the inner switch on the center console
or outer switch on the back door.
OPERATING FROM INSIDE
The ignition key must be in the ON" position.
The back window moves as long as you
hold the inner switch.
To open: Push the switch on the
side.
To close: Push the switch on the
side.

"
"

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

You can also open the back window when
the back window wiper is working. At that
time, the wiper stops working until the
window is closed again.
If you push in the window lock switch on
the driver’s door (with power windows) or
on the instrument panel (without power
windows), the back window cannot be operated.

With power windows (driver’s door)

OPERATING FROM OUTSIDE
After turning and holding the key for a few
seconds, the back window will move as
far as holding the key.
To open: Turn the key counterclockwise.
To close: Turn the key clockwise.
You can also open the back window when
the back window wiper is working. At the
time, the wiper stops working until the
window is closed again.

Without power windows
(instrument panel)
2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

Back door
CAUTION
To avoid serious personal injury, you
must do the following.

Always make sure the heads, hands
and other parts of the bodies of all
occupants are kept completely inside the vehicle before you close
the power back window. If someone’s neck, head or hands gets
caught in a closing window, it
could result in a serious injury.
When anyone closes the power
back window, make sure that he/she
operates the window safely.

Keep the back window closed while
driving. This not only keeps the
luggage from being thrown out but
also prevents exhaust gases from
entering the vehicle.
Vehicles with wireless remote control systemTo open the back window with the
wireless remote control transmitter, see
Wireless remote control" in this section.

LOCKING AND UNLOCKING WITH KEY
Insert the key into the keyhole and turn
it.

When small children are in the vehicle, never let them use the power
back window switch without supervision. Use the window lock switch
to prevent them from making unexpected use of the switch.

To lock: Turn the key clockwise.
To unlock: Turn the key counterclockwise.
To open the back door, pull the lever.
The back door will be controlled by operating the power door lock switch.

Never leave small children alone in
the vehicle, especially with the ignition key still inserted. They could
use the power back window switch
and get trapped in a window. Unattended children can be involved in
serious accidents.

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

CAUTION

Driver’s side

Keep the back window and back door
closed while driving. This not only
keeps the luggage from being thrown
out but also prevents exhaust gases
from entering the vehicle.

NOTICE

When closing the back door, use the
inside strap for easier reach to the
back door.

To prevent damage to the back door
dampers, do not apply any force,
paint or let any other foreign matter
on them.
Front passenger’s side

To close the back door, lower it and press
down on it. After closing the back door,
try pulling it up to make sure it is securely closed.
See Luggage stowage precautions" in
Section 2 for precautions in loading luggage.

With power windows
2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

Hood
Driver’s side

LOCKING
AND
UNLOCKING
WITH
POWER BACK DOOR LOCK SWITCH
Push the switch.
To lock: Push the switch on the front side.
To unlock: Push the switch on the rear
side.
Operating the power door lock switch simultaneously locks or unlocks the back
door (see Side doors" in this section).
Vehicles with wireless remote control systemTo lock or unlock the back door, see
Wireless remote control" in this section.
To open the hood:

Front passenger’s side

1. Pull the hood lock release lever. The
hood will spring up slightly.

CAUTION
Before driving, be sure that the hood
is closed and securely locked. Otherwise, the hood may open unexpectedly while driving and an accident may
occur.

Without power windows

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

Theft deterrent system

2. In front of the vehicle, pull up the
auxiliary catch lever and lift the
hood.

3. Hold the hood open by inserting the
support rod into the slot.
Before closing the hood, check to see that
you have not forgotten any tools, rags,
etc. and return the support rod to its
clipthis prevents rattles. Then lower the
hood make sure it locks into place. If
necessary, press down gently on the front
edge to lock it.

To deter the vehicle theft, the system
is designed to give an alarm if any of
the side doors, back door or hood is
forcibly unlocked or opened or the battery terminal is disconnected and then
reconnected when the vehicle is locked.
The alarm blows the horn intermittently
and flashes the headlights and tail lights.

CAUTION
After inserting the support rod into
the slot, make sure the rod supports
the hood security from falling down
on to your head or body.
2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

The system will automatically be set after
30 seconds. When the system is set, the
indicator light will start flashing again.

Reactivating the alarm

4. After making sure the indicator light
starts flashing, you may leave the vehicle.

The alarm will activate again under the
same
circumstances
described
in
Activating the system".

Never leave anyone in the vehicle when
you set the system, because unlocking
from the inside will activate the system.

Stopping the alarm

WHEN THE SYSTEM IS SET

Turn the ignition key from the LOCK"

Activating the system
SETTING THE SYSTEM
1. Turn the ignition key to the LOCK"
position and remove it.

The system will give the alarm under the
following conditions:

Unlock any of the side doors or back

opened without the key or wireless remote control transmitter, or if the back
door or hood is forcibly opened.

These ways cancel the system at the
same time.

2. Have all passengers get out of the
vehicle.

The indicator light will come on when the
system is activated.

to ON" position.
door with the key or wireless remote
control transmitter.

If the battery terminal is disconnected

The indicator light will come on when all
the side doors, back door and hood are
closed and locked.

The alarm will be stopped by the following
three ways:

If any of the side doors is unlocked or

The indicator light will start flashing when
the key is removed from the ignition
switch. (See Engine immobiliser system"
for details.)

3. Close and lock all the side doors, back
door and hood.

Once set, the system automatically resets
the alarm after the alarm stops.

and then reconnected.

If the alarm has been activated and the
key is not in the ignition switch, all the
side doors and back door will re−lock automatically.
After one minute, the alarm will automatically stop and the indicator light will starts
flashing again.
2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

Fuel tank cap
TESTING THE SYSTEM
1. Open all the windows.
2. Set the system as described above.
The side doors and back door should
be locked with the key or wireless remote control transmitter. Be sure to
wait until the indicator light goes off or
starts flashing.
3. Unlock any side door from the inside.
The system should activate the alarm.
4. Stopping the alarm as described above.
5. Repeat this operation for the other
doors and hood. When testing on the
hood, also check that the system is
activated when the battery terminal is
disconnected and then reconnected.

1. To open the fuel filler door, pull the
lever.

If the system does not work properly,
have it checked by your Toyota dealer.

CAUTION

When refueling, turn off the engine.

Do not smoke, cause sparks or allow open flames when refueling.
The fumes are flammable.

When opening the cap, do not remove the cap quickly. In hot weather, fuel under pressure could cause
injury by spraying out of the filler
neck if the cap is suddenly removed.

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

2. To remove the fuel tank cap, turn
the cap slowly counterclockwise,
then pause slightly before removing
it.
It is not unusual to hear a slight swoosh
when the cap is opened. When installing,
turn the cap clockwise till you hear a
click.
If the cap is not tightened securely, the
malfunction indicator lamp comes on.
Make sure the cap is tightened securely.
The indicator lamp goes off after driving
several times. If the indicator lamp does
not go off, contact your Toyota dealer as
soon as possible.

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

Electric moon roof
CAUTION

To operate the moon roof, use the
switch beside the personal lights.

Make sure the cap is tightened se-

The moon roof works when the ignition
switch is in the ON" position.

curely to prevent fuel spillage in
case of an accident.

Key off operation

Use only a genuine Toyota fuel tank

If all the doors are closed, it works for 43
seconds even after the ignition switch is
turned off. It stops working when any of
the doors is opened.

cap for replacement. It is designed
to regulate fuel tank pressure.

Sun shade operation
The sun shade can be opened or closed
by hand.
Sliding operation

Sliding operation
To open: Push the switch on the Ɯ" side.
The roof will fully open. To stop the roof
partway, push the switch on the Ɲ" side.
The sun shade will be opened together
with the roof.
To close: Push the switch on the Ɲ"
side.
As a precaution when closing, the roof
stops at the three−quarters closed position
before fully closing. Therefore, release the
switch and then push it again to close it
completely.

Tilting operation

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

Tilting operation
To tilt up: Push the switch on the TILT
UP" side.
To lower: Push the switch on the TILT
DOWN" side.
You may stop the moon roof at any desired position. The roof will move while
the switch is being pushed and stop when
released.

CAUTION
To avoid serious personal injury, you
must do the following.

While the vehicle is moving, always
keep the heads, hands and other
parts of the bodies of all occupants
away from the roof opening. Otherwise, they could be seriously injured if the vehicle stops suddenly
or if the vehicle is involved in an
accident.

Always make sure nobody places
his/her head, hands and other parts
of the body in the roof opening before you close the roof. If someone’s neck, head or hands gets
caught in the closing roof, it could
result in a serious injury. When
anyone closes the roof, first make
sure it is safe to do so.

Never leave small children alone in
the vehicle, especially with the ignition key still inserted. They could
use the moon roof switches and get
trapped in the roof opening. Unattended children can be involved in
serious accidents.

Never sit on top of the vehicle
around the roof opening.

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

SECTION

1− 3

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND
CONTROLS
Seats, Seat belts, Steering wheel and Mirrors
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fold−down rear seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Flattening seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seat heaters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SRS driver and front passenger airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Child restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tilt steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Outside rear view mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Anti−glare inside rear view mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

36
36
39
40
41
42
43
52
59
78
78
80
81

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

Front seats
Seat adjustment
precautions

Seats
While the vehicle is being driven, all vehicle occupants should have the seatback
upright, sit well back in the seat and properly wear the seat belts provided.

Adjust the driver’s seat so that the foot
pedals, steering wheel and instrument
panel controls are within easy reach of
the driver.

CAUTION

Do not drive the vehicle unless the

Adjustments should not be made

occupants are properly seated. Do
not allow sitting on top of a
folded−down seatback, or in the
luggage compartment. Persons not
properly seated and/or properly restrained by seat belts can be severely injured in the event of emergency braking or a collision.

while the vehicle is moving, as the
seat may unexpectedly move and
cause the driver to lose control of
the vehicle.

During driving, do not allow passengers to stand up or move
around between seats. Severe injuries can occur in the event of emergency braking or a collision.

When adjusting the seat, be careful
not to hit the seat against a passenger or luggage.

After adjusting the seat position,
try sliding it forward and backward
to make sure it is locked in position.

After adjusting the seatback, exert
body pressure to make sure it is
locked in position.

Do not put objects under the seats
as they may interfere with the seat−
lock mechanism or unexpectedly
push up the seat position adjusting
lever; the seat may suddenly move,
causing the driver to lose control of
the vehicle.

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

While adjusting the seat, do not put
your hands under the seat or near
the moving parts. You may catch
and injure your hands or fingers.

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

Adjusting front seats
(manual seat)
1. SEAT POSITION ADJUSTING LEVER
Pull the lever up. Then slide the seat
to the desired position with slight body
pressure and release the lever.
2. SEATBACK
LEVER

ANGLE

ADJUSTING

3. SEAT CUSHION ANGLE ADJUSTING
KNOB
Turn the knob either way.
4. SEAT
LUMBAR
ADJUSTING LEVER

SUPPORT

Pull the lever forward or backward.

Lean forward and pull the lever up.
Then lean back to the desired angle
and release the lever.

CAUTION
To reduce the risk of sliding under
the lap belt during a collision, avoid
reclining the seatback any more than
needed. The seat belts provide maximum protection in a frontal or rear
collision when the driver and the passenger are sitting up straight and
well back in the seats. If you are
reclined, the lap belt may slide past
your hips and apply restraint forces
directly to the abdomen. Therefore, in
the event of a frontal collision, the
risk of personal injury may increase
with increasing recline of the seatback.

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

Adjusting front seats
(power seat)
1. SEAT POSITION AND SEAT CUSHION
ANGLE ADJUSTING SWITCH
Move the control switch in the desired
direction.
Releasing the switch will stop the seat at
that position.
Do not place anything under the front
seats. It might interfere with the seat−lock
mechanism.
2. SEATBACK
SWITCH

ANGLE

ADJUSTING

Move the control switch in the desired
direction.
Releasing the switch will stop the seatback at that position.

SUPPORT

Push the control switch in the desired
direction.
Releasing the switch will stop the seatback at that position.

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

Fold−down rear seats

BEFORE FOLD−DOWN REAR SEAT
Stow the rear seat belt and buckles as
shown in the illustration.

1. Swing the bottom cushion up by
pulling the lock release strap, and
remove the head restraint.

This prevents the belt and buckles from
falling out when you fold the seatback.

It is hinged at the front edge, so just lift
it up.

NOTICE

If desired, each bottom cushion may be
swung up separately.

2. Store the head restraints in the head
restraint retaining holes in the bottom cushion.

The seat belt and buckles must be
stowed before you fold the seatback.

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

Flattening seatbacks
(manual seat)
CAUTION
When returning the seats
original position:

to their

Make sure the seat belts are not
twisted or caught in the seatback
and are arranged in their proper
position and are ready to use.

Make sure the seatback is securely

3. Unlock
down.

the

seatback

and

fold

locked by pushing forward and rearward on the top of the seatback.
Failure to do so will prevent seat
belt from operating properly. Be
certain to replace the head restraints.

This will enlarge the luggage compartment
as far as the raised seat cushion. See
Luggage stowage precautions" in Section
2 for precautions in loading luggage.

Make sure the bottom cushion is

If desired, each seatback may be folded
separately.

Do not forget to pull out the buckle

securely locked by trying to pull up
the edge of the cushion near the
lock release straps.
of the side seatbelts and center
seatbelt and arranged them in their
proper position and are ready to
use.

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

To flatten the seatback, do the followings.
1. Remove the head restraint and slide
the seat further forward than the
front−most lock position.

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

Seat heaters
CAUTION

Do not allow passengers to ride on
the flattened seat while driving; use
the seat in the normal position.

After putting back the seat, try
pushing the seat and seatback forward and rearward to make sure it
is secured in place. Be certain to
replace head restraint.

2. Pull the lock release lever up, then
push down the seatback.

To turn on the seat heater, push the
switch.

When returning the seatback upright, be
careful not to make yourself hit by the
seatback which will bound with considerable spring force.

The key must be in the ON" position.
Push the switch once again to turn the
seat heater off.

After returning the seat to its original
position, be certain to replace the head
restraint.

CAUTION
Occupants must use caution when operating the seat heater because it
may make them feel too hot or cause
burns at low temperatures (erythema,
varicella). Use extra caution for;

Babies, small children, elderly persons, sick persons or handicapped
persons
2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

Head restraints
For your safety and comfort, adjust the
head restraint before driving.

Persons who have delicate skin
Persons who are exhausted
Persons who have taken alcohol or

To raise: Pull it up.
To lower: Push it down while pressing the
lock release button.

drugs which induce sleep (sleeping
drug, cold remedy, etc.)

On some models, you can also move the
head restraint forward or backward. If
such adjustment is desired, pull or push
the head restraint.

To prevent the seat overheating, do
not use the seat heater with a blanket, cushion, or other insulating objects which cover the seat.

The head restraint is most effective when
it is close to your head. Therefore, using
a cushion on the seatback is not recommended.

NOTICE
z Do not put unevenly weighed objects on the seat and do not stick
sharp objects (needles, nails, etc.)
into the seat.

Front

CAUTION

Adjust the center of the head restraint so that it is closet to the
top of your ears.

z When cleaning the seats, do not
use organic substances (paint thinner, benzine, alcohol, gasoline,
etc.). They may damage the heater
and seat surface.

After adjusting the head restraint,
make sure it is locked in position.

Do not drive with the head restraints removed.

z To prevent the battery from being
discharged, turn the switch on
when the engine is running.

Rear

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

Seat belts
Seat belt precautions
Toyota strongly urges that the driver and
passengers in the vehicle be properly restrained at all times with the seat belts
provided. Failure to do so could increase
the chance of injury and/or the severity of
injury in accidents.
Child. Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child until the child becomes large enough to properly wear the
vehicle’s seat belts. See Child restraint"
for details.
If a child is too large for a child restraint
system, the child should sit in the rear
seat and must be restrained using the
vehicle’s seat belt. According to accident
statistics, the child is safer when properly
restrained in the rear seat than in the
front seat.

Do not allow the child to stand up or
kneel on either rear or front seats. An
unrestrained child could suffer serious injury or death during emergency braking or
a collision. Also do not let the child sit on
your lap. It does not provide sufficient
restraint.
Pregnant woman. Toyota recommends the
use of a seat belt. Ask your doctor for
specific recommendations. The lap belt
should be worn securely and as low as
possible over the hips and not on the
waist.
Injured person. Toyota recommends the
use of a seat belt. Depending on the injury, first check with your doctor for specific
recommendation.

If a child must sit in the front seat, the
seat belts should be worn properly. If an
accident occurs and the seat belts are not
worn properly, the force of the rapid inflation of the airbag may cause death or
serious injury to the child.

CAUTION
Persons should ride in their seats
properly wearing their seat belts
whenever the vehicle is moving.
Otherwise, they are much more likely
to suffer serious bodily injury or
death in the event of sudden braking
or a collision.
When using the seat belts, observe
the following:

Use the belt for only one person at
a time. Do not use a single belt for
two or more peopleeven children.

Avoid reclining the seatbacks too
much. The seat belts provide maximum protection when the seatbacks
are in the upright position. (Refer
to the seat adjustment instructions.)

Be careful not to damage the belt
webbing or hardware. Take care that
they do not get caught or pinched
in the seat or side doors.

Inspect the belt system periodically.
Check for cuts, fraying, and loose
parts. Damaged parts should be replaced. Do not disassemble or
modify the system.
2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

Front and rear outside seat
belts
If the seat belt cannot be pulled out of the
retractor, firmly pull the belt and release
it. You will then be able to smoothly pull
the belt out of the retractor.

Keep the belts clean and dry. If
they need cleaning, use a mild soap
solution or lukewarm water. Never
use bleach, dye, or abrasive cleanersthey may severely weaken the
belts. (See Cleaning the interior"
in Section 5.)

When a passenger’s shoulder belt is completely extended and is then retracted
even slightly, the belt is locked in that
position and cannot be extended. This feature is used to hold the child restraint
system securely. (For details, see Child
restraint" in this section.) To free the belt
again, fully retract the belt and then pull
the belt out once more.

Replace the belt assembly (including bolts) if it has been used in a
severe impact. The entire assembly
should be replaced even if damage
is not obvious.
Adjust the seat as needed (front seats
only) and sit up straight and well back
in the seat. To fasten your belt, pull it
out of the retractor and insert the tab
into the buckle.

After inserting the tab, make sure

You will hear a click when the tab locks
into the buckle.

Do not insert coins, clips, etc. in

The seat belt length automatically adjusts
to your size and the seat position.
The retractor will lock the belt during a
sudden stop or on impact. It also may
lock if you lean forward too quickly. A
slow, easy motion will allow the belt to
extend, and you can move around freely.

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

CAUTION
the tab and buckle are locked and
that the belt is not twisted.
the buckle as this may prevent you
from properly latching the tab and
buckle.

If the seat belt does not function
normally, immediately contact your
Toyota dealer. Do not use the seat
until the seat belt is fixed. It cannot
protect an adult occupant or your
child from injury.

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

CAUTION
Always make sure the shoulder belt
is positioned across the center of
your shoulder. The belt should be
kept away from your neck, but not
falling off your shoulder. Failure to
do so could reduce the amount of
protection in an accident and cause
serious injuries in a collision.

Take up
slack
Too high

Keep as low on
hips as possible

Seat belts with an adjustable shoulder
anchor

Adjust the position
shoulder belts.

Adjust the shoulder anchor position to
your size.

Position the lap belt as low as
on your hipsnot on your waist,
just it to a snug fit by pulling the
portion upward through the latch

To raise: Slide the anchor up.
To lower: Push in the lock release button
and slide the anchor down.

the

lap and
possible
then adshoulder
plate.

After adjustment make sure the anchor is
locked in position.

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

Rear center seat belt
Lengthen

CAUTION

High−positioned

lap
belts
and
loose−fitting belts both could cause
serious injuries due to sliding under the lap belt during a collision
or other unintended result. Keep
the lap belt positioned as low on
hips as possible.

For your safety, do not place the
shoulder belt under your arm.

To release the belt, press the buckle−release button and allow the belt to retract.

Sit up straight and well back in the
seat. To fasten your belt, insert the tab
into the buckle.

If the belt does not retract smoothly, pull
it out and check for kinks or twists. Then
make sure it remains untwisted as it retracts.

You will hear a click when the tab locks
into the buckle.

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

If the belt is not long enough for you, hold
the tab at a right angle to the belt and
pull on the tab.

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

CAUTION

Too high

After inserting the tab, make sure
the tab and buckle are locked and
that the belt is not twisted.

Do not insert coins, clips, etc. in
the buckle as this may prevent you
from properly latching the tab and
buckle.

If the seat belt does not function
normally, immediately contact your
Toyota dealer. Do not use the seat
until the seat belt is fixed. It cannot
protect an adult occupant or your
child from injury.

Adjust to a
snug fit

Keep as low on hips as possible

Remove excess length of the belt and
adjust the belt position.

To release the belt, press the buckle−release button.

To shorten the belt, pull the free end of
the belt.
Position the lap belt as low as possible
on your hipsnot on your waist, then adjust it to a snug fit.

CAUTION
High−positioned and loose−fitting lap
belts could cause serious injuries due
to sliding under the lap belt during a
collision or other unintended result.
Keep the lap belt positioned as low
on hips as possible.
2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

Stowing rear seat belt
and buckles

Seat belt extender
If your seat belt
curely because it
personalized seat
able from your
charge.

cannot be fastened seis not long enough, a
belt extender is availToyota dealer free of

Please contact your local Toyota dealer so
that the dealer can order the proper required length for the extender. Bring the
heaviest coat you expect to wear for proper measurement and selection of length.
Additional ordering information is available
at your Toyota dealer.

When using the seat belt extender,
observe the following. Failure to follow these instructions could result in
less effectiveness of the seat belt restraint system in case of vehicle accident, increasing the chance of personal injury.

Never use the seat belt extender if
you can fasten the seat belt without
it.

Remember that the extender pro-

The rear seat belt and buckles can be
stowed when not in use.

vided for you may not be safe when
used on a different vehicle, or for
another person or at a different
seating position than the one originally intended for.

Seat belt and buckles must be stowed
before you fold the seat back. (See Fold−
down rear seats" in this section.)

CAUTION

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

Front seat belt pretensioners
CAUTION

After inserting the tab, make sure
the tab and buckle are locked and
that the seat belt extender is not
twisted.

Do not insert coins, clips, etc. in
the buckle as this may prevent you
from properly latching the tab and
buckle.

If the seat belt does not function
To connect the extender to the seat
belt, insert the tab into the seat belt
buckle so that the PRESS" signs on
the buckle−release buttons of the extender and the seat belt are both facing
outward as shown.

normally, immediately contact your
Toyota dealer. Do not use the seat
until the seat belt is fixed. It cannot
protect an adult occupant or your
child from injury.

The driver and front passenger’s seat
belt pretensioners are designed to be
activated in response to a severe frontal impact.
When the airbag sensor detects the shock
of a severe frontal impact, the front seat
belts are quickly drawn back in by the
retractors so that the belts snugly restrain
the front seat occupants.

You will hear a click when the tab locks
into the buckle.
When releasing the seat belt, press on
the buckle−release button on the extender,
not on the seat belt. This helps prevent
damage to the vehicle interior and extender itself.

The front seat belt pretensioners are activated even with no passenger in the front
seat.
Collisions occurring at certain speeds and
angles may cause the seat belt pretensioners and SRS airbags not to operate
all together.

When not in use, remove the extender
and store in the vehicle for future use.

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

When the front seat belt pretensioners are
activated, an operating noise may be
heard and a small amount of smoke−like
gas may be released. This gas is harmless and does not indicate that a fire is
occurring.
Once the front seat belt pretensioners
have been activated, the seat belt retractors remain locked.

CAUTION

This indicator comes on when the ignition key is turned to the ON" position.
It goes off after about 6 seconds. This
means the front seat belt pretensioners
are operating properly.

The front seat belt pretensioner system
mainly consists of the following components and their locations are shown in the
illustration.

This warning light system monitors the
airbag sensor assembly, front airbag sensors, front seat belt pretensioner assemblies, warning light, inflators, interconnecting wiring and power sources. (For details,
see Service reminder indicators and
warning buzzers" in Section 1−5.)

2. SRS warning light

1. Front airbag sensors
3. Front seat belt pretensioner assemblies
4. Airbag sensor assembly
The front seat belt pretensioners are controlled by the airbag sensor assembly. The
airbag sensor assembly consists of a safing sensor and airbag sensor.

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

Do not modify, remove, strike or open
the front seat belt pretensioner assemblies, airbag sensor or surrounding area or wiring. Doing any of
these may cause sudden operation of
the front seat belt pretensioners or
disable the system, which could result in death or serious injury.
Failure to follow these instructions
can result in death or serious injuries.

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

NOTICE
Do not perform any of the following
changes without
consulting your
Toyota dealer. Such changes can
interfere with proper operation of the
front seat belt pretensioners in some
cases.
z Installation of electronic devices
such as a mobile two−way radio,
cassette tape player or compact
disc player
z Repairs on or near the front seat
belt retractor assemblies
z Modification of the suspension system
z Modification of the front end structure
z Attachment of a grille guard (bull
bar, kangaroo bar, etc.), snowplow,
winches or any other equipment to
the front end
z Repairs made on or near the front
fenders, front end structure or console

This front seat belt pretensioner system
has a service reminder indicator to inform
the driver of operating problems. If any of
the following conditions occurs, this
indicates a malfunction of the airbags or
pretensioners. Contact your Toyota dealer
as soon as possible to service the
vehicle.

The light does not come on when the
ignition key is turned to the ON" position, or the light remains on.

The light comes on or flashes while

In the following cases, contact your Toyota
dealer as soon as possible:

The front part of the vehicle (shaded
in the illustration) was involved in an
accident that was not severe enough to
cause the front seat belt pretensioners
to operate.

Either front seat belt pretensioner assembly
or
surrounding
area
is
scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged.

driving.

If either front seat belt does not retract
or cannot be pulled out due to a malfunction or activation of the relevant
front seat belt pretensioner.
2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

SRS driver and front
passenger airbags
Your vehicle is equipped with a crash
sensing and diagnostic module, which will
record the use of the seat belt restraint
system by the driver and the front passenger when the SRS airbags are inflated.

CAUTION
A driver or front passenger too close
to the steering wheel or dashboard
during airbag deployment can be
killed or seriously injured. Toyota
strongly recommends that:
The SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) airbags are designed to provide
further protection for the driver and
front passenger in addition to the primary safety protection provided by the
seat belts.
In response to a severe frontal impact,
the SRS airbags work together with the
seat belts to help reduce injury by inflating. The SRS airbags help to reduce injuries mainly to the driver’s or front passenger’s head or chest caused by directly
hitting the steering wheel or dashboard.
The front passenger airbag is activated
even with no passenger in the front seat.

The driver sit as far back as possible from the steering wheel while
still maintaining control of the vehicle.

The front passenger sit as far back
as possible from the dashboard.

All vehicle occupants be properly
restrained using the available seat
belts.

Be sure to wear your seat belt properly.

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

This indicator comes on when the ignition key is turned to the ON" position.
It goes off after about 6 seconds. This
means the SRS airbags are operating
properly.
This warning light system monitors the
airbag sensor assembly, front airbag sensors, front seat belt pretensioner assemblies, inflators, warning light, interconnecting wiring and power sources. (For details,
see Service reminder indicators and
warning buzzers" in Section 1−5.)

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

However, this threshold velocity will be
considerably higher if the vehicle strikes
an object, such as a parked vehicle or
sign pole, which can move or deform on
impact, or if it is involved in an underride
collision (e.g. a collision in which the nose
of the vehicle underrides", or goes under,
the bed of a truck, etc.).
It is possible that in some collisions at the
lower zone of airbag sensor detection and
activation the SRS airbags and seat belt
pretensioners will not operate all together.
The SRS airbag system is designed to
activate in response to a severe frontal
impact within the shaded area between
the arrows in the illustration.

For the safety of all occupants, always
wear your seat belts properly.

The SRS airbags will deploy if the severity of the impact is above the designed
threshold level, comparable to an approximate 25 km/h (15 mph) collision when
impacting straight into a fixed barrier that
does not move or deform.

Collision from the rear

Collision from the side
Vehicle rollover

The SRS airbags are not designed to
inflate if the vehicle is involved in a
side or rear collision, if it rolls over, or
if it is involved in a low−speed frontal
collision.

If the severity of the impact is below the
above threshold level, the SRS airbags
may not deploy.

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

Hitting a curb,
edge of pavement
or hard material

In a severe frontal impact, the sensors
detect deceleration and the system triggers the airbag inflators. Then a chemical
reaction in the inflators quickly fills the
airbags with non−toxic gas to help restrain
the forward motion of the occupants.

Falling into or
jumping over a
deep hole

Landing hard or vehicle falling

The SRS airbags may deploy if a serious impact occurs to the underside of
your vehicle. Some examples are shown
in the illustration.

The SRS airbag system consists mainly of
the following components, and their locations are shown in the illustration.
1. Front airbag sensors
2. SRS warning light
3. Airbag module for front passenger
(airbag and inflator)
4. Airbag sensor assembly
5. Airbag module for driver
(airbag and inflator)
The airbag sensor assembly consists of a
safing sensor and airbag sensor.

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

When the airbags inflate, they produce a
fairly loud noise and release some smoke
and residue along with non−toxic gas. This
does not indicate a fire. This gas is normally harmless; however, for those who
have delicate skin, it may cause a minor
skin irritation. Be sure to wash off any
residue as soon as possible to prevent
any potential skin irritation.
Deployment of the airbags happens in a
fraction of a second, so the airbags must
inflate with considerable force. While the
system is designed to reduce serious injuries, it may also cause minor burns or
abrasions and swelling.
Parts of the airbag module (steering wheel
hub, dashboard) may be hot for several
minutes, but the airbags themselves will
not be hot. The airbags are designed to
inflate only once.

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

A crash severe enough to inflate the airbags may break the windshield as the
vehicle buckles. In vehicles with a passenger airbag the windshield may also be
damaged by absorbing some of the force
of the inflating airbag.

CAUTION

The SRS airbag system is designed
only as a supplement to the primary protection of the driver side and
front passenger side seat belt systems. The front seat occupants can
be killed or seriously injured by the
inflating airbags if they do not wear
the available seat belts properly.
During sudden braking just before
a collision, an unrestrained driver
or front passenger can move forward into direct contact with or
close proximity to the airbag which
may then deploy during the collision. To ensure maximum protection
in an accident, the driver and all
passengers in the vehicle must
wear their seat belts properly. Wearing a seat belt properly during an
accident reduces the chances of
death or serious injury or being
thrown out of the vehicle. For
instructions and precautions concerning the seat belt system, see
Seat belts" in this section.

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

Improperly seated and/or restrained
infants and children can be killed
or seriously injured by the deploying airbag. An infant or child who
is too small to use a seat belt
should be properly secured using a
child
restraint
system.
Toyota
strongly recommends that all infants and children be placed in the
rear seat of the vehicle and properly restrained. The rear seat is the
safest for infants and children. For
instructions concerning the installation of a child restraint system, see
Child restraint" in this section.

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

Move seat
fully back

Never put a rear−facing child re-

A forward−facing child restraint sys-

Do not sit on the edge of the seat

straint system in the front passenger seat because the force of the
rapid inflation of the front passenger airbag can cause death or serious injury to the child.

tem should be allowed to be put on
the front passenger seat only when
it is unavoidable. Always move the
seat as far back as possible, because the force of the deploying
front passenger airbag could cause
death or serious injury to the child.
For instructions concerning the
installation of a child restraint system, see Child restraint" in this
section.

or lean over the dashboard when
the vehicle is in use. The airbags
inflate with considerable speed and
force; you may be killed or seriously injured. Sit up straight and well
back in the seat, and always use
your seat belt properly.

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

Do not modify or remove any wiring. Do not modify, remove, strike
or open any components such as
the steering wheel pad, steering
wheel, column cover, front passenger airbag cover, front passenger
airbag or airbag sensor assembly.
Doing any of these may cause sudden SRS airbag inflation or disable
the system, which could result in
death or serious injury.
Failure to follow these instructions
can result in death or serious injury.

Do not allow a child to stand up,

Do not put objects or your pets on

or to kneel on the front passenger
seat. The airbag inflates with considerable speed and force; the child
may be killed or seriously injured.

or in front of the dashboard or
steering wheel pad that houses the
airbag system. They might restrict
inflation or cause death or serious
injury as they are projected rearward by the force of deploying airbags. Likewise, the driver and front
passenger should not hold things in
their arms or on their knees.

Do not hold a child on your lap or
in your arms. Use a child restraint
system in the rear seat. For instructions concerning the installation of
a child restraint system, see Child
restraint" in this section.

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

NOTICE
Do not perform any of the following
changes without
consulting your
Toyota dealer. Such changes can interfere with proper operation of the
SRS airbag system in some cases.
z Installation of electronic devices
such as a mobile two−way radio,
cassette tape player or compact
disc player
z Modification of the suspension system
z Modification of the front end structure
z Attachment of a grille guard (bull
bar, kangaroo bar, etc.), snowplow,
winches or any other equipment to
the front end
z Repairs made on or near the front
fenders, front end structure, console, steering column, steering
wheel or dashboard near the front
passenger airbag

This SRS airbag system has a service
reminder indicator to inform the driver of
operating problems. If either of the following conditions occurs, this indicates a malfunction of the airbags. Contact your
Toyota dealer as soon as possible to service the vehicle.

The light does not come on when the
ignition key is turned to the ON" position, or the light remains on.

The light comes on while driving.

In the following cases, contact your Toyota
dealer as soon as possible:

The SRS airbags have been inflated.
The front part of the vehicle (shaded
in the illustration) was involved in an
accident that was not severe enough to
cause the SRS airbags to inflate.

The pad section of the steering wheel
or
front passenger
airbag cover
(shaded in the illustration) is scratched,
cracked, or otherwise damaged.

NOTICE
Do not disconnect the battery cables
before contacting your Toyota dealer.

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

Child restraint
Child restraint precautions
Toyota strongly urges the use of child
restraint systems for children small
enough to use them.
The laws of all fifty states in the U.S.A.
and Canada now require the use of a
child restraint system.
Your vehicle conforms to SAE J1819.
If a child is too large for a child restraint
system, the child should sit in the rear
seat and must be restrained using the
vehicle’s seat belt. See Seat belts" for
details.

CAUTION

For effective protection in automobile accidents and sudden stops,
child must be properly restrained
using a seat belt or child restraint
system depending on the age and
size of the child. Holding a child in
your arms is not a substitute for a
child restraint system. In an accident, the child can be crushed
against the windshield, or between
you and the vehicle’s interior.

Child restraint system
Toyota strongly urges use of a
proper child restraint system which
conforms to the size of the child,
and is put on the rear seat. According to accident statistics, the child
is safer when properly restrained in
the rear seat than in the front seat.

Never put a rear−facing child restraint system on the front seat. In
the event of an accident, the force
of the rapid inflation of the airbag
can cause death or serious injury if
a rear−facing child restraint system
is put on the front seat.

Unless it is unavoidable, do not put
a forward−facing child restraint system on the front seat.

A forward−facing child restraint system should be put on the front seat
only when it is unavoidable. Always
move the seat as far back as possible, because the force of the deploying airbag could cause death or
serious injury to the child.

A child restraint system for a small
child or baby must itself be properly
restrained on the seat with either the
lap belt or the lap portion of the lap/
shoulder belt. You must carefully consult the manufacturer’s instructions
which accompany the child restraint
system.
To provide proper restraint, use a child
restraint system following the manufacturer’s instructions about the appropriate age
and size of the child for the child restraint
system.
Install the child restraint system correctly
following the instructions provided by its
manufacturer of the system. General
directions are also provided under the following illustrations.
The child restraint system should be
installed on the rear seat. According to
accident statistics, the child is safer when
properly restrained in the rear seat than
in the front seat.

Make sure that you have complied
with all installation instructions provided
by
the
child
restraint
manufacturer and that the system is
properly secured.
2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

Types of child restraint
system
CAUTION

When not using the child restraint system,
keep it secured with the seat belt or place
it somewhere other than the passenger
compartment. This will prevent it from injuring passengers in the event of a sudden stop or accident.

(A) Infant seat
(B) Convertible seat
(C) Booster seat
Install the child restraint system following
the instructions provided by its manufacturer.

Unless it is unavoidable, do not put
a forward−facing child restraint system on the front seat.

After installing the child restraint
system, make sure it is secured in
place following the manufacturer’s
instructions. If it is not restrained
securely, it may cause death or serious injury to the child in the
event of a sudden stop or accident.

Child restraint systems are classified into
the following 3 types depending on the
child’s age and size.

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

Installation with 2−point
type seat belt

(A) Infant seat

(A) INFANT SEAT INSTALLATION
An infant seat is used in rear−facing
position only.

(B) Convertible seat
2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

CAUTION

After inserting the tab, make sure
the tab and buckle are locked and
that the lap belt is not twisted.

Do not insert coins, clips, etc. in
the buckle as this may prevent you
from properly latching the tab and
buckle.

If the seat belt does not function

CAUTION

Do not put a rear−facing child restraint system on the rear seat if it
interferes with the lock mechanism
of the front seats. This can cause
severe injury to the child and front
passenger in case of sudden braking or a collision.

1. Run the center lap belt through or
around the infant seat following the
instructions provided by its manufacturer and insert the tab into the buckle
taking care not to twist the lap belt.

If your driving position is not satisfactory, install the child restraint
system at another position.

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

normally, it cannot protect your
child from injury. Contact your
Toyota dealer immediately. Do not
use the seat until the seat belt is
fixed.

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

2. While pressing the infant seat firmly
against the seat cushion and seatback,
tighten the lap belt by pulling its free
end to hold the infant seat securely.

CAUTION

3. To remove the infant seat, press the
buckle−release button.

Push and pull the child restraint system in different directions to be sure
it is secure. Follow all the installation
instructions provided by its manufacturer.

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

(B) CONVERTIBLE SEAT INSTALLATION
A convertible seat is used in forward−
facing or rear−facing position depending on the child’s age and size. When
installing, follow the manufacturer’s
instructions about the applicable child’s
age and size as well as direction for
installing of the child restraint system.

CAUTION

If your driving position is not satisfactory, install the child restraint
system at another position.

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

1. Run the center lap belt through or
around the convertible seat following
the
instructions
provided
by
its
manufacturer and insert the tab into
the buckle taking care not to twist the
lap belt.

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

CAUTION

After inserting the tab, make sure
the tab and buckle are locked and
that the lap belt is not twisted.

Do not insert coins, clips, etc. in
the buckle as this may prevent you
from properly latching the tab and
buckle.

If the seat belt does not function
normally, it cannot protect your
child from injury. Contact your
Toyota dealer immediately. Do not
use the seat until the seat belt is
fixed.

2. While pressing the convertible seat
firmly against the seat cushion and
seatback, tighten the lap belt by pulling
its free end to hold the convertible seat
securely.

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

CAUTION
Push and pull the child restraint system in different directions to be sure
it is secure. Follow all the installation
instructions provided by its manufacturer.

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

Installation with 3−point
type seat belt

3. To remove the convertible seat, press
the buckle−release button.

(A) INFANT SEAT INSTALLATION
An infant seat is used in rear−facing
position only.

CAUTION

Never put a rear−facing child restraint system in the front passenger seat because the force of the
rapid inflation of the front passenger airbag can cause death or serious injury to the child.

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

CAUTION

After inserting the tab, make sure
the tab and buckle are locked and
that the lap and shoulder portions
of the belt are not twisted.

Do not insert coins, clips, etc. in
the buckle as this may prevent you
from properly latching the tab and
buckle.

If the seat belt does not function
Do not put a rear−facing child restraint system in the rear seat if it
interferes with the lock mechanism
of the front seats. This can cause
severe injury to the child and front
passenger in case of sudden braking or a collision.

1. Run the lap and shoulder belt through
or around the infant seat following the
instructions provided by its manufacturer and insert the tab into the buckle
taking care not to twist the belt. Keep
the lap portion of the belt tight.

normally, it cannot protect your
child from injury. Contact your
Toyota dealer immediately. Do not
use the seat until the seat belt is
fixed.

If your driving position is not satisfactory, do not install the child restraint system on the left seat.

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

2. Fully extend the shoulder belt to put it
in the lock mode. When the belt is
then retracted even slightly, it cannot
be extended.
To hold the infant seat securely, make
sure the belt is in the lock mode before
letting the belt retract.

3. While pressing
against the seat
let the shoulder
it will go to hold
ly.

the infant seat firmly
cushion and seatback,
belt retract as far as
the infant seat secure-

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

CAUTION
Push and pull the child restraint system in different directions to be sure
it is secure. Follow all the installation
instructions provided by its manufacturer.

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

4. To remove the infant seat, press the
buckle−release button and allow the
belt to retract completely. The belt will
move freely again and be ready to
work for an adult or older child passenger.

(B) CONVERTIBLE SEAT INSTALLATION
A convertible seat is used in forward−
facing and rear−facing position depending on the child’s age and size. When
installing, follow the manufacturer’s instructions about the applicable child’s
age and size as well as directions for
installing a child restraint system.

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

CAUTION

Never put a rear−facing child restraint system in the front passenger seat because the force of the
rapid inflation of the front passenger airbag can cause death or serious injury to the child.

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

Move seat
fully back

A forward−facing child restraint sys-

Do not put a rear−facing child re-

straint system in the rear seat if it
interferes with the lock mechanism
of the front seats. This can cause
severe injury to the child and front
passenger in case of sudden braking or a collision.

If your driving position is not satisfactory, do not install the child restraint system on the left seat.

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

1. Run the lap and shoulder belt through
or around the convertible seat following
the
instructions
provided
by
its
manufacturer and insert the tab into
the buckle taking care not to twist the
belt. Keep the lap portion of the belt
tight.

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

CAUTION

After inserting the tab, make sure
the tab and buckle are locked and
that the lap and shoulder portions
of the belt are not twisted.

Do not insert coins, clips, etc. in
the buckle as this may prevent you
from properly latching the tab and
buckle.

If the seat belt does not function
normally, it cannot protect your
child from injury. Contact your
Toyota dealer immediately. Do not
use the seat until the seat belt is
fixed.

2. Fully extend the shoulder belt to put it
in the lock mode. When the belt is
then retracted slightly, it cannot be extended.
To hold the convertible seat securely,
make sure the belt is in the lock mode
before letting the belt retract.

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

3. While pressing the convertible seat
firmly against the seat cushion and
seatback, let the shoulder belt retract
as far as it will go to hold the convertible seat securely.

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

CAUTION
Push and pull the child restraint system in different directions to be sure
it is secure. Follow all the installation
instructions provided by its manufacturer.

4. To remove the convertible seat, press
the buckle−release button and allow the
belt to retract completely. The belt will
move freely again and be ready to
work for an adult or older child passenger.

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

CAUTION

Always make sure the shoulder belt
is positioned across the center of
child’s shoulder. The belt should be
kept away from child’s neck, but
not falling off child’s shoulder. Failure to do so could reduce the
amount of protection in an accident
and cause serious injuries in a collision.

Move seat
fully back

Both high−positioned lap belts and
CAUTION

A forward−facing child restraint system should be allowed to be put on
the front passenger seat only when it
is unavoidable. Always move the seat
as far back as possible, because the
force of the deploying front passenger airbag could cause death or serious injury to the child.

1. Sit the child on a booster seat. Run
the lap and shoulder belt through or
around the booster seat and child following the instructions provided by its
manufacturer and insert the tab into
the buckle taking care not to twist the
belt.
Make sure the shoulder belt is correctly
across the child’s shoulder and that the
lap belt is positioned as low as possible
on child’s hips. See Seat belts" for details.

loose−fitting belts could cause serious injuries due to sliding under
the lap belt during a collision or
other unintended result. Keep the
lap belt positioned as low on a
child’s hips as possible.

For child’s safety, do not place the
shoulder belt under child’s arm.

After inserting the tab, make sure
the tab and buckle are locked and
that the lap and shoulder portions
of the belt are not twisted.

Do not insert coins, clips, etc. in
the buckle as this may prevent your
child from properly latching the tab
and buckle.

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

Using a top strap
If the seat belt does not function
normally, it cannot protect your
child from injury. Contact your
Toyota dealer immediately. Do not
use the seat until the seat belt is
fixed.

2. To remove the child restraint system,
press the buckle−release button and allow the belt to retract.

Outside position

Center position

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

Follow the procedure below for a child
restraint system that requires the use
of a top strap.

Anchor brackets

Symbol

Use the anchor bracket on the back of the
rear seatback to attach the top strap.

TO USE OUTSIDE ANCHOR BRACKET:
1. Remove the head restraint.

Anchor brackets are installed for each
rear seating position.
This symbol indicates the location of user
ready tether anchorage.

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

2. Open the anchor bracket cover with
the symbol mark shown in the illustration.

3. Fix the child restraint system with
the seat belt.
Latch the hook onto the anchor
bracket and tighten the top strap.
For instructions to install the child restraint system, see Child restraint" in this
section.

CAUTION
Make sure the top strap is securely
latched, and check that the child restraint system is secure by pushing
and pulling it in different directions.
Follow all the installation instructions
provided by its manufacturer.

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

4. Replace the head restraint.

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

CAUTION

When you use the center anchor
bracket, make sure the top strap
runs through between both seatbacks and tighten it. The top strap
on seatback could cause death or
serious injury due to abnormal
moving of the child restraint system
in case of sudden braking or a collision.

Make sure the top strap is securely
Be sure to close all covers when the anchor bracket is not in use.

TO USE CENTER ANCHOR BRACKET:
Fix the child restraint system with the
seat belt. Run the top strap through
between both seatbacks.
Latch the hook onto the anchor bracket
and tighten the top strap.

latched, and check that the child
restraint system is secure by pushing and pulling it in different directions. Follow all the installation instructions provided by its manufacturer.

For instructions to install the child restraint system, see Child restraint" in this
section.

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

Tilt steering wheel

Outside rear view mirrors
CAUTION

Do not adjust the steering wheel
while the vehicle is moving. It may
cause the driver to mishandle the
vehicle and an accident may occur
resulting in death or serious injuries.

After adjusting the steering wheel,
try moving it up and down to make
sure it is locked in position.

To change the steering wheel angle,
hold the steering wheel, pull the lock
release lever toward you, tilt the steering wheel to the desired angle and return the lever to its original position.

Adjust the mirror so that you can see
the side of your vehicle in the mirror.
Be careful when judging the size or distance of any object seen in the outside
rear view mirror on the passenger’s side.
It is a convex mirror with a curved surface. Any object seen in a convex mirror
will look smaller and farther away than
when seen in a flat mirror.

When the steering wheel is in a low position, it will spring up as you release the
lock release lever.

On some models, when you push the
back window defogger switch, the heater
panels in the outside rear view mirrors will
quickly clear the surface. To turn on the
back window defogger, see Back window
and outside rear view mirror defoggers" in
Section 1−4.

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

Power Rear view mirror
control
To adjust a mirror, use the switches.

CAUTION

1. Master switchTo select the mirror to
be adjusted
Place the switch at L" (left) or R"
(right).

Do not adjust the mirror while the
vehicle is moving. It may cause the
driver to mishandle the vehicle and
an accident may occur resulting in
death or serious injuries.

2. Control switchTo move the mirror P ush the switch in the desired
direction.

On some models, since the mirror

Mirror can be adjusted when key is in the
ACC" or ON" position.

surfaces can get hot, keep your
hands off them when the defogger
switch is on.

NOTICE
With power windows (door armrest)

If ice should jam the mirror, do not
operate the control or scrape the mirror face. Use a spray de−icer to free
the mirror.

Without power windows
(instrument panel)
2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

Folding rear view mirrors

Anti−glare inside rear view
mirror
CAUTION
Do not adjust the mirror while the
vehicle is moving. It may cause the
driver to mishandle the vehicle and
an accident may occur resulting in
death or serious injuries.

The rear view mirrors can be folded
backward for parking in restricted
areas.

Adjust the mirror so that you can just
see the rear of your vehicle in the mirror.

To fold the rear view mirror, push backward.

To reduce glare from the headlights of
the vehicle behind you during night
driving, operate the lever on the lower
edge of the mirror.

CAUTION
Do not drive with the mirrors folded
backward. Both the driver and passenger side rear view mirrors must
be extended and properly adjusted
before driving.

Daylight drivingLever at position 1
The reflection in the mirror has greater
clarity at this position.
Night drivingLever at position 2
Remember that by reducing glare you also
lose some rear view clarity.

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

Sun visors

Vanity mirrors
CAUTION
Do not extend the plate at the end of
the sun visor when the visor is in the
position 1. It can cover the anti−glare
inside rear view mirror and obstruct
the rear view.

Type A

To block out glare, move the sun visor.
To block out glare from the frontSwing
down the sun visor (position 1).
To block out glare from the sideSwing
down the sun visor, remove it from the
hook and swing it to the lateral side (position 2).
If glare comes from obliquely behind you,
extend the plate at the end of the visor
(to position 3).

Type B
2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

To use the vanity mirrors, swing down
the sun visor and open the cover.
Type B onlyThe vanity light comes on
when you open the cover.

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

SECTION

1− 4

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND
CONTROLS
Lights, Wipers and Defogger
Headlights and turn signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Emergency flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Instrument panel light control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front fog lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Interior light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Personal lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Luggage compartment light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ignition switch light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Windshield wipers and washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Back window wiper and washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Back window and outside rear view mirror defoggers . . . . . . . . . . . .

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

84
85
86
86
86
87
87
88
88
89
90

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

Headlights and turn signals
NOTICE
To prevent the battery from being discharged, do not leave the lights on
for a long period when the engine is
not running.
Daytime running light system (on some
models)
The headlights turn on when the parking
brake is released with the engine started,
even with the light switch in the OFF"
position. They will not go off until the
ignition switch is turned off.

HEADLIGHTS
To turn on the following lights: Twist
the headlight/turn signal lever knob.
Position 1Parking, tail, license plate,
side marker and instrument panel lights
Position
above

2Headlights

and

all

the

To turn on the other exterior lights and
instrument panel lights, twist the knob to
the position 1.
Under the daytime running light system,
the headlights turn on at reduced intensity.
Twist the knob to the position 2 to turn
to full intensity for driving at night.

The lights automatically turn off when the
driver’s door is opened with the ignition
switch turned off. To turn them on again,
turn the key to the ON" position or actuate the headlight switch. If you are going
to park for over one week, make sure the
headlight switch is off.

High−Low beamsFor high beams, turn
the headlights on and push the lever away
from you (position 1). Pull the lever toward you (position 2) for low beams.
The headlight high beam indicator light
(blue light) on the instrument panel will
tell you that the high beams are on.
Flashing the high
(position 3)Pull the
back. The high beam
when you release the

beam headlights
lever all the way
headlights turn off
lever.

You can flash the high beam headlights
with the knob turned to OFF".

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

Emergency flashers
NOTICE
To prevent the battery from being discharged, do not leave the switch on
longer than necessary when the engine is not running.

TURN SIGNALS
To signal a turn, push the headlight/
turn signal lever up or down to position
1.
The key must be in the ON" position.
The lever automatically returns after you
make a turn, but you may have to return
it by hand after you change lanes.
To signal a lane change, move the lever
up or down to the pressure point (position
2) and hold it.
If the turn signal indicator lights (green
lights) on the instrument panel flash faster
than normal, a front or rear turn signal
bulb is burned out.

To turn on the
push the switch.

emergency

flashers,

All the turn signal lights will flash. To turn
them off, push the switch once again.
Turn on the emergency flashers to warn
other drivers if your vehicle must be
stopped where it might be a traffic hazard.
Always pull as far off the road as possible.
The turn signal light switch will not work
when the emergency flashers are operating.

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

Instrument panel light control

Front fog lights

Interior light

To adjust the brightness of the instrument panel lights, turn the knob.

To turn on the front fog lights, twist
the band of the headlight and turn signal switch lever. They will come on
only when the headlights are on low
beam.

To turn on the interior light, slide the
switch.
The interior light switch has the following
positions:
ON"Keeps the light on all the time.
OFF"Turns the light off.
DOOR"Turns the light on when any of
the side door is opened. The light goes
off when all the side doors are closed.

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

Personal lights
(with moon roof)

Personal lights
(without moon roof)

To turn on the personal light, push the
switch on 1 side. To turn the light off,
push the switch on 2 side.

To turn on the personal light, push the
switch. To turn the lights off, push the
switch once again.

Luggage compartment light

To turn on the luggage compartment
light, slide the switch.
The luggage compartment light switch has
the following positions:
ON"Keeps the light on all the time.
OFF"Turns the light off.
DOOR"Turns the light on when the
back door is opened. The light goes off
when the back door is closed.

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

Ignition switch light

Windshield wipers and
washer (intermittent type)
To squirt washer fluid, pull the lever
toward you.
If the windshield wipers are off, they will
operate a couple of times after the washer
squirts.
For instructions on adding washer fluid,
see Adding washer fluid" in Section 7−3.
In freezing weather, warm the windshield
with the defroster before using the washer.
This will help prevent the washer fluid
from freezing on your windshield, which
can block your vision.

For easy access to the ignition switch,
the ignition switch light comes on when
the driver’s door is opened.
The light remains on for some time after
driver’s door is closed.

To turn on the windshield wipers, move
the lever to the desired setting.
The key must be in the ON" position.
Lever position

Speed setting

Position 1

Intermittent

Position 2

Slow

Position 3

Fast

The INT TIME" band lets you adjust the
wiping time interval when the wiper lever
is in the intermittent position (position 1).
Twist the band upward to increase the
time between sweeps, and downward to
decrease it.

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

NOTICE
Do not operate the wipers if the windshield is dry. It may scratch the
glass.

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

Windshield wipers and
washer (mist type)

Back window wiper and washer
In freezing weather, warm the windshield
with the defroster before using the washer.
This will help prevent the washer fluid
from freezing on your windshield, which
can block your vision.

NOTICE
Do not operate the wipers if the windshield is dry. It may scratch the
glass.

To turn on the windshield wipers, move
the lever to the desired setting.

To turn on the back window wiper, twist
the lever knob upward.

The key must be in the ON" position.

Lever position

Speed setting

Lever position

Speed setting

Position 1

Slow

Position 1

Intermittent

Position 2

Fast

Position 2

Normal

For a single sweep of the windshield,
push the lever up and release it.

To squirt washer fluid on the back window,
twist the knob upward or downward as far
as it will go (position 3 or 4). The knob
automatically returns from these positions
after you release it.

To squirt washer fluid, pull the lever
toward you.
For instructions on adding washer fluid,
see Adding washer fluid" in Section 7−3.

For instructions on adding washer fluid,
see Adding washer fluid" in Section 7−3.

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

Back window and outside rear
view mirror defoggers
Make sure you turn the defoggers off
when the surfaces are clear. Leaving the
defoggers on for a long time could cause
the battery to discharge, especially during
stop−and−go driving. The defoggers are
not designed for drying rain water or for
melting snow.

NOTICE
Do not operate the back window wiper if the back window is dry. It may
scratch the glass.

CAUTION
On some models, since the mirror
surfaces can get hot, keep your
hands off them when the defogger
switch is on.
To defog or defrost the back window,
push the switch with the back window
closed.
The key must be in the ON" position.
The thin heater wires on the inside of the
back window will quickly clear the surface.
An indicator light will illuminate to indicate
the defogger is operating.
On some models, heater panels in the
outside rear view mirrors will also quickly
clear the surfaces.
Push the switch once again to turn the
defogger off.
The system will automatically shut off after the defoggers have operated about 15
minutes.

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

NOTICE
When cleaning the inside of the back
window, be careful not to scratch or
damage the heater wires or connectors.

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

SECTION

1− 5

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND
CONTROLS
Gauges, Meters and Service reminder indicators
Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Odometer and two trip meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Service reminder indicators and warning buzzers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

92
92
93
93
94

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

Engine coolant temperature
gauge

Fuel gauge
If the fuel tank is completely empty, the
malfunction indicator lamp comes on. Fill
the fuel tank immediately.
The indicator lamp goes off after driving
several times. If the indicator lamp does
not go off, contact your Toyota dealer as
soon as possible.

The gauge works when the ignition
switch is on and indicates the approximate quantity of fuel remaining in the
tank.

The gauge indicates the engine coolant
temperature when the ignition switch is
on. The engine operating temperature
will vary with changes in weather and
engine load.

Nearly fullNeedle at F"
Nearly emptyNeedle at E"

If the needle moves into the red zone,
your engine is too hot. If your vehicle
overheats, stop your vehicle and allow the
engine to cool.

It is a good idea to keep the tank over
1/4 full.
If the fuel level approaches E" or the low
fuel level warning light comes on, fill the
fuel tank as soon as possible.

Your vehicle may overheat during severe
operating conditions, such as:

Driving up a long hill on a hot day.
Reducing speed or stopping after high

On inclines or curves, due to the movement of fuel in the tank, the fuel gauge
needle may fluctuate or the low fuel level
warning light may come on earlier than
usual.

speed driving.

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

Tachometer

Odometer and two trip meters

The tachometer indicates engine speed
in thousands of rpm (revolutions per
minute). Use it while driving to select
correct shift points and to prevent engine lugging and over−revving.

This meter displays the odometer and
two trip meters.

Idling for a long period with the air
conditioning on in stop−and−go traffic.

Towing a trailer.
NOTICE
z Do not remove the thermostat in
the engine cooling system as this
may cause the engine to overheat.
The thermostat is designed to control the flow of coolant to keep the
temperature of the engine within
the specified operating range.
z Do not continue driving with an
overheated engine. See If your vehicle overheats" in Section 4.

Driving with the engine running too fast
causes excessive engine wear and poor
fuel economy. Remember, in most cases
the slower the engine speed, the greater
the fuel economy.

NOTICE
Do not let the indicator needle get
into the red zone. This may cause
severe engine damage.

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

1. OdometerShows the total
the vehicle has been driven.

distance

2. Two trip metersShow two different
distances independently driven since
the last time each trip meter was set
to zero.
You can use one trip meter to calculate
the fuel economy and the other to
measure the distance on each trip. All
trip meter data is cancelled if the electrical power source is disconnected.
3. Trip meter reset knobResets the two
trip meters to zero, and also change
the meter display.

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

Service reminder indicators
and warning buzzers
To change the meter display, quickly
push and release the knob. The meter
display changes in the order from the
odometer to trip meter A to trip meter
B, then back to the odometer each
time you push.

If the indicator or
buzzer comes on...
(a)

Do this.

If parking brake is
off, stop
immediately and
contact Toyota
dealer.

To reset the trip meter A to zero, display the meter A reading, then push
and hold the knob until the meter is
set to zero. The same process can be
applied for resetting the trip meter B.
(b)

Fasten driver’s
seat belt.
(indicator and buzzer)

(c)

Fasten front
passenger’s seat
belt.

(d)

Stop and check.

If the indicator or
buzzer comes on...
(f)

Take vehicle to
Toyota dealer.

(g)

Fill up tank.

(h)
or

(i)

Stop and check.

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

Take vehicle to
Toyota dealer.
If brake system
warning light is
also on, stop
immediately and
contact Toyota
dealer.
Take vehicle to
Toyota dealer.

and
(e)

Do this.

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

If the indicator or
buzzer comes on...
(j)

Do this.

Close all doors.

(k)

Take vehicle to
Toyota d ealer
immediately.

(a) Brake System Warning Light and
buzzer

Have your vehicle checked at your
Toyota dealer in the following cases:

This light comes on in the following cases
when the ignition key is in the ON" position.

The light does not come on even if the

When the parking brake is applied...

The light does not come on even if the

This light comes on for a few seconds
when the ignition key is turned to the
ON" position on even after the parking
brake is released.

ignition key is turned on with the parking brake released.

When the brake fluid level is low...
(l)

(m)

Key reminder
buzzer

Remove key.

Shift front drive
control lever out of
N".

CAUTION
It is dangerous to continue driving
normally when the brake fluid level is
low.

When the hydraulic brake booster
fails...

(n)

(o)

Stop and check.

If the hydraulic booster causes a problem
resulting in poor braking performance, the
warning light comes on and buzzer sounds
continuously.

Add washer fluid.

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

parking brake is applied when the ignition key is in the ON" position.

A warning light turning on briefly during
operation does not indicate a problem.

CAUTION
If any of the following conditions occurs, immediately stop your vehicle at
a safe place and contact your Toyota
dealer.

The light does not turn off even
after the parking brake is released
while the engine is running.

The warning buzzer comes on together with the warning light.
In either case, this can indicate that
the brakes may not work properly
and your stopping distance will become longer. Depress the brake
pedal firmly and bring the vehicle
to an immediate stop.

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

The brake system warning light remains on together with the ABS"
warning light.
In this case, not only the anti−lock
brake system will fail but also the
vehicle will become extremely unstable during braking.
Any of the following conditions may occur, but do not indicate the malfunction:

The light may stay on for about 60
seconds after the ignition key is turned
to the ON" position. It is normal if it
turns off after a while.

Depressing the brake pedal repeatedly
may turn on the warning light and
buzzer. It is normal if the light turns off
and the buzzer stops sounding after a
few seconds.

You may hear a small sound in the
engine compartment
started or the brake
repeatedly. This is
sound of the brake
not a malfunction.

after the engine is
pedal is depressed
a pump pulsating
system, and it is

(b) Driver’s Seat Belt Reminder Light
and Buzzer
This light and buzzer remind
buckle up the driver’s seat belt.

you

Once the ignition key is turned to ON" or
START", the reminder light flashes and
buzzer come on if the driver’s seat belt
is not fastened. Unless the driver fastens
the belt, the light keeps on flashing and
the buzzer sounds for about 4 to 8 seconds.
(c) Front Passenger’s
minder Light

Seat

Belt

This light warns that the battery is being
discharged.
If it comes on while you are driving, there
is a problem somewhere in the charging
system.
The engine ignition will continue to operate, however, until the battery is discharged. Turn off the air conditioning,
blower, radio, etc., and drive directly to
the nearest Toyota dealer or repair shop.

Re-

This light reminds you to buckle up the
front passenger’s seat belt.
Once the ignition key is turned to ON" or
START", the reminder light flashes if a
passenger sits in the front passenger seat
and does not fasten the seat belt. Unless
the front passenger fastens the belt, the
light stays flashing.
If luggage load is placed on the front
passenger seat, depending on its weight
and how it is placed on the seat, built−in
sensors in the seat cushion may detect
the pressure, causing the reminder light to
come on.

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

(d) Discharge Warning Light

NOTICE
Do not continue driving if the engine
drive belt is broken or loose.

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

(e) Low Oil Pressure Warning Light

(f) Malfunction Indicator Lamp

This light warns that the engine oil pressure is too low.

This lamp
cases.

If it flickers or stays on while you are
driving, pull off the road to a safe place
and stop the engine immediately. Call a
Toyota dealer or qualified repair shop for
assistance.

a. The fuel tank is completely empty.
(See Fuel gauge" in this section for
instructions.)

The light may occasionally flicker when
the engine is idling or it may come on
briefly after a hard stop. There is no
cause for concern if it then goes out when
the engine is accelerated slightly.
The light may come on when the oil level
is extremely low. It is not designed to
indicate low oil level, and the oil level
must be checked using the level dipstick.

comes

the

following

b. The fuel tank cap is not tightened securely. (See Fuel tank cap" in Section
1−2 for instructions.)
c. There is a problem somewhere in your
engine, automatic transmission electrical system or electronic throttle control
system.
If it comes on while you are driving in
case c, have your vehicle checked/repaired by your Toyota dealer as soon as
possible.

NOTICE
Do not drive the vehicle with the
warning light oneven for one block.
It may ruin the engine.

If this lamp comes on and the engine
speed does not increase with the accelerator pedal depressed down to about the
middle position, there may be a problem
somewhere in your electronic throttle control system. At this time, if you depress
the accelerator pedal more firmly and
slowly, you can drive your vehicle at low
speeds. Have your vehicle checked by
your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.
Even if the abnormality of the electronic
throttle control system is corrected during
low speed driving, the system may not be
recovered until the engine is stopped and
the ignition key is turned to ACC" or
LOCK" position.
(g) Low Fuel Level Warning Light
This light comes on when the fuel level
in the tank becomes nearly empty. Fill up
the tank as soon as possible.
On inclines or curves, due to the movement of fuel in the tank, the low fuel level
warning light may come on earlier than
usual.

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

(h) ABS" Warning Light
The light comes on when the ignition key
is turned to the ON" position. If the anti−
lock brake system and the brake assist
system work properly, the light turns off
after a few seconds. Thereafter, if either
of the systems malfunctions, the light
comes on again.
When the ABS" warning light is on (and
the brake system warning light is off), the
anti−lock brake system, the brake assist
system, the traction control system (two−
wheel drive vehicles), the active traction
control system (four−wheel drive vehicles)
and the vehicle skid control system do not
operate, but the brake system still operates conventionally.
When the ABS" warning light is on (and
the brake system warning light is off), the
anti−lock brake system does not operate
so that the wheels could lock up during
a sudden braking or braking on slippery
road surfaces.

If either of the following conditions occurs, this indicates a malfunction somewhere in the parts monitored by the
warning light system. Contact your Toyota dealer as soon as possible to service the vehicle.

The light does not come on when the
ignition key is turned to the ON" position, or remains on.

The light comes on while you are driving.
A warning light turning on briefly during
operation does not indicate a problem.

CAUTION
If the ABS" warning light remains on
together with the brake system warning light, immediately stop your vehicle at a safe place and contact your
Toyota dealer.
In this case, not only the anti−lock
brake system will fail but also the
vehicle will become extremely unstable during braking.

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

Either of the following conditions may
occur, but do not indicate the malfunction:

The light may stay on for about 60
seconds after the ignition key is turned
to the ON" position. It is normal if it
turns off after a while.

Depressing the brake pedal repeatedly
may turn on the light. It is normal if it
turns off after a few seconds.
(i) Vehicle Skid Control System and
Traction Control System (two−wheel
drive models) or Active Traction
Control System (four−wheel drive
models) Warning Lights
These lights warn that there is a problem
somewhere in the vehicle skid control system and traction control system (two−
wheel drive models) or active traction control system (four−wheel drive models).

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

(j) Open Door Warning Light

(l) Key Reminder Buzzer

This light remains on until all the doors
and back door are completely closed.

This buzzer reminds you to remove the
key when you open the driver’s door with
the ignition key in the ACC" or LOCK"
position.

The lights will come on when the ignition
key turned to ON", and will go off after
a few seconds.

The warning light system monitors the airbag sensor assembly, front airbag sensors, front seat belt pretensioner assemblies,
inflators,
warning
light,
interconnecting wiring and power sources.

The lights may come on for 60 seconds
after the ignition key is turned to the ON"
position. It is normal if they go out after
a while.
Depressing the brake pedal repeatedly
may turn on the lights. It is normal if they
go out after a few seconds.
When the VSC/TRAC" warning light and
TRAC OFF" (two−wheel drive models) or
VSC OFF" (four−wheel drive models) indicator light come on the vehicle skid system and/or traction control system (two−
wheel drive models) or active traction
control system (four−wheel drive models)
do not operate, but there is no problem
to continue your driving.

(k) SRS Warning Light
This light will come on when the ignition key is turned to the ON" position.
After about 6 seconds, the light will go
off. This means the system of the airbag and front seat belt pretensioner are
operating properly.

If either of the following conditions occurs,
this indicates a malfunction somewhere in
the parts monitored by the warning light
system. Contact your Toyota dealer as
soon as possible to service the vehicle.

(m) Unengaged
Park"
Warning
Light ( four−wheel drive vehicles)
This light warns that the transmission
Park" mechanism is not engaged. If the
front drive control lever is in the N" position while the selector lever is in the P"
position, the transmission will disengage
and the wheels will not lock.

CAUTION
To restore the park function, shift the
front drive control lever out of N",
or the vehicle can move.

The light does not come on when the
ignition key is turned to the ON" position or remains on.

The light comes on or flashes while
driving.

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

(n) Automatic
Transmission
Temperature Warning Light

Fluid

This light warns that the automatic transmission fluid temperature is too high.
If this light comes on while you are driving, slow down and pull off the road. Stop
the vehicle at a safe place and put the
selector lever in P". With the engine idling, wait until the light goes off. If the
light goes off, you may start the vehicle
again. If the light does not go off, call a
Toyota dealer or qualified repair shop for
assistance.

NOTICE
Continued driving with the warning
light on may damage the automatic
transmission.
(o) Low windshield Washer Fluid Level
Warning Light (Canada)
The light warns that the windshield washer
fluid level is too low. Add washer fluid at
your earliest opportunity. (For instructions,
see Adding washer fluid" in Section 7−3.)

100

CHECKING
SERVICE
REMINDER
INDICATORS (except the low fuel level
warning light and low windshield
washer fluid level warning light)
1. Apply the parking brake.
2. Open one of the side doors or back
door.
The open door warning light should
come on.
3. Close the door.
The open door warning light should go
off.
4. Turn the ignition key to ON", but do
not start the engine.
All the service reminder indicators except the open door warning light should
come on. The ABS" and VSC/TRAC"
warning lights, TRAC OFF" (two−wheel
drive models) or VSC OFF" (four−
wheel drive models) indicator light and
slip indicator light go off after a few
seconds. The SRS warning light goes
off after about 6 seconds.

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

There may be the case that the ABS"
warning light (brake assist system
warning light), VSC/TRAC" warning
light and TRAC OFF" (two−wheel drive
models) or VSC OFF" (four−wheel
drive models) indicator light stay on for
about 60 seconds after the ignition key
is turned to the ON" position. It is
normal if they go out after a while.
If any service reminder indicator or warning buzzer does not function as described
above, either the bulb is burned out or the
circuit is in need of repair. Have it
checked by your Toyota dealer as soon as
possible.

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

SECTION

1− 6

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND
CONTROLS
Ignition switch, Transmission and Parking brake
Ignition switch with steering lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Four−wheel drive system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Traction control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Active traction control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vehicle skid control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

102
103
113
117
120
122
124
125

101

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

Ignition switch with steering
lock
You must shift the selector lever into the
P" position before turning the key from
ACC" to the LOCK" position.
Vehicles with engine immobiliser system
Once you remove the key, the engine immobiliser system is automatically set. (See
Engine immobiliser system" in Section
1−2.)
When starting the engine, the key may
seem stuck at the LOCK" position. To
free it, first be sure the key is pushed all
the way in, and then rock the steering
wheel slightly while turning the key gently.
START"Starter motor on. The key
will return to the ON" position when
released.
For starting tips, see Section 3.
ON"Engine on and all accessories
on.

NOTICE
Do not leave the key in the ON"
position if the engine is not running.
The battery will discharge and the
ignition could be damaged.

This is the normal driving position.
ACC"Accessories such as the radio
operate, but the engine is off.
If you leave the key in the ACC" or
LOCK" position and open the driver’s
door, a buzzer will remind you to remove
the key.
LOCK"Engine is off and the steering
wheel is locked. The key can be removed only at this position.

102

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

Automatic transmission
Two−wheel drive models
Lock release button
To prevent misshifting

Selector lever

Your automatic transmission has a shift
lock system to minimize the possibility of
incorrect operation. This means you can
only shift out of P" position when the
brake pedal is depressed (with the ignition
switch in ON" position and the lock release button depressed).
(a) Selector lever
The shift position is also displayed on the
instrument cluster.
P: Parking, engine starting and
key removal

Overdrive switch

R: Reverse
N: Neutral
D: Normal driving (with overdrive on)
With the brake pedal depressed,
shift while holding the lock release
button in. (The ignition switch must
be in ON" position.)

2: Stronger engine braking
Driving pattern
selector button

L: Maximum engine braking

Shift while holding the lock
release button in.

Shift normally.

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

103

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

Vehicles with cruise controlWhen the
cruise control is being used, even if you
downshift the transmission by pushing and
releasing the overdrive switch, engine
braking will not be enabled because the
cruise control is not cancelled.
For ways to decrease the vehicle speed,
see Cruise control" in this section.
(c) Normal driving
1. Start the engine as instructed in How
to start the engine" in Section 3. The
transmission must be in P" or N".
(b) Overdrive switch
You can select either third gear (with
overdrive off) or fourth gear (with overdrive on) by pushing this switch.
To turn the overdrive off, push the switch.
The O/D OFF" indicator light should come
on. To turn the overdrive on again, push
the switch again. The O/D OFF" indicator
light should go off.
Always drive your vehicle with the overdrive on for better fuel economy and
quieter driving.
If the engine is turned off when the overdrive is off and restarted, the overdrive
will be on automatically.

104

2. With your foot holding down the brake
pedal, shift the selector lever to D".
When the lever is in the D" position, the
automatic transmission system will select
the most suitable gear for running conditions such as normal cruising, hill climbing, hard towing, etc.
Always turn the overdrive on for better
fuel economy and quieter driving. If the
engine coolant temperature is low, the
transmission will not shift into the overdrive gear even with the overdrive on.

CAUTION
Never put your foot on the accelerator pedal while shifting.
2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

3. Release the parking brake and brake
pedal. Depress the accelerator pedal
slowly for smooth starting.
(d) Using engine braking
To use engine braking, you can downshift
the transmission as follows:

Push the overdrive switch. The O/D
OFF" indicator light will come on and
the transmission will downshift to third
gear.

Shift into the 2" position. The transmission will downshift to second gear
when the vehicle speed drops down to
or lower than 119 km/h (73 mph), and
stronger engine braking will be enabled.

Shift into the L" position. The transmission will downshift to first gear
When the vehicle speed drops down to
or lower than 58 km/h (36 mph), and
maximum engine braking will be enabled.

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

CAUTION
Be careful when downshifting on a
slippery
surface.
Abrupt
shifting
could cause the vehicle to spin or
skid.
(e) Using 2" and L" positions
The 2" and L" positions are used for
strong engine braking as described previously.
With the selector lever in 2" or L", you
can start the vehicle in motion as with the
lever in D".
With the selector lever in 2", the vehicle
will start in first gear and automatically
shift to second gear.
With the selector lever in L", the transmission is engaged in first gear.

NOTICE
z Be careful not to over−rev the engine. Watch the tachometer to keep
engine rpm from going into the red
zone. The approximate maximum allowable speed for each position is
given below for your reference:
2" . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 km/h (74 mph)
L" . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 km/h (40 mph)
z Do not continue hill climbing or
hard towing for a long time in the
2" or L" position. This may cause
severe automatic transmission damage from overheating. To prevent
such damage, D" position should
be used in hill climbing or hard
towing.
(f) Backing up
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.
2. With the brake pedal held down with
your foot, shift the selector lever to the
R" position.

NOTICE

(g) Parking
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.
2. Pull the parking brake lever up fully to
securely apply the parking brake.
3. With the brake pedal pressed down,
shift the selector lever to the P" position.

CAUTION
Never attempt to move the selector
lever into P" position under any circumstances while the vehicle is moving. Serious mechanical damage and
loss of vehicle control may result.
(h) Good driving practice

If the transmission repeatedly shifts up
and down between third gear and overdrive when climbing a gentle slope, the
overdrive should be turned off. Be sure
to turn the switch on immediately afterward.

When towing a trailer, in order to maintain engine braking efficiency, do not
use overdrive.

Never shift into reverse while the vehicle is moving.
2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

105

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

CAUTION
Always keep your foot on the brake
pedal while stopped with the engine
running. This prevents the vehicle
from creeping.

NOTICE
Do not hold the vehicle on an upgrade with the accelerator pedal. It
can cause the transmission to overheat. Always use the brake pedal or
parking brake.

106

(i) Rocking your vehicle if stuck

CAUTION
If your vehicle becomes stuck in
snow, mud, sand, etc., then you may
attempt to rock the vehicle free by
moving it forward and backward. Do
not attempt this procedure if people
or objects are anywhere near the vehicle. During the rocking operation
the vehicle may suddenly move forward or backward as it becomes unstuck, causing injury or damage to
nearby people or objects.

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

NOTICE
If you rock your vehicle, observe the
following precautions to prevent damage to the transmission and other
parts.
z Do not depress the accelerator pedal while shifting the selector lever
or before the transmission is completely shifted to forward or reverse
gear.
z Do not race the engine and avoid
spinning the wheels.
z If your vehicle remains stuck after
rocking the vehicle several times,
consider other ways such as towing.

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

(k) If you cannot shift the selector lever out of P" position
If you cannot shift the selector lever from
the P" position even though the brake
pedal is depressed, use the shift lock
override button. For instructions, see If
you cannot shift automatic transmission
selector lever" in Section 4.

(j) Driving in PWR" (Power) mode
In the PWR" mode, the transmission is
shifted up and down at a higher vehicle
speed than in the NORM" (Normal) mode
and a more powerful acceleration is
achieved. To set the PWR" mode, push
in the driving pattern selector button. The
PWR" mode indicator light comes on.
For ordinary driving, Toyota recommends
using the NORM" mode to improve fuel
economy.

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

107

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

Four−wheel drive models
Selector lever

Lock release button
To prevent misshifting

Overdrive switch

P: Parking, engine starting and
key removal
R: Reverse
N: Neutral
D: Normal driving (with overdrive on)

With the brake pedal depressed,
shift while holding the lock release
button in. (The ignition switch must
be in ON" position.)

2: Stronger engine braking
Driving pattern
selector button

Shift while holding the lock
release button in.

Shift normally.

108

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

L: Maximum engine braking

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

When the front drive control lever is in
L4"
(low−speed
position,
four−wheel
drive), the driving pattern selector setting
has no effect on gear shift timing. (See
Four−wheel drive system" in this section
for information of the front drive control
lever.)

Always turn the overdrive on for better
fuel economy and quieter driving. If the
engine coolant temperature is low or when
the front drive control lever is in L4"
(low−speed position, four−wheel drive), the
transmission will not shift into the overdrive gear even with the overdrive on.
(See Four−wheel drive system" in this
section for information of the front drive
control lever.)

CAUTION
Never put your foot on the accelerator pedal while shifting.
3. Release the parking brake and brake
pedal. Depress the accelerator pedal
slowly for smooth starting.
(d) Using engine braking

2. With your foot holding down the brake
pedal, shift the selector lever to D".

To use engine braking, you can downshift
the transmission as follows:

When the lever is in the D" position, the
automatic transmission system will select
the most suitable gear for running conditions such as normal cruising, hill climbing, hard towing, etc.

Push the overdrive switch. The O/D

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

OFF" indicator light will come on and
the transmission will downshift to third
gear.

109

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

Shift into the 2" position. The transmission will downshift to second gear
when the vehicle speed drops down to
or lower than the following speed, and
stronger engine braking will be enabled.

Front drive control lever in H"
114km/h(70mph)

For ways to decrease the vehicle speed,
see Cruise control" in this section.

Front drive control lever in L4"
41km/h(25mph)

CAUTION

Shift into the L" position. The transmission will downshift to first gear
when the vehicle speed drops down to
or lower than the following speed, and
maximum engine braking will be enabled.

Be careful when downshifting on a
slippery
surface.
Abrupt
shifting
could cause the vehicle to spin or
skid.

(e) Using the 2" and L", positions
The 2" and L" positions are used for
strong engine braking as described previously.
With the selector lever in 2" or L", you
can start the vehicle in motion as with the
lever in D".
With the selector lever in 2", the vehicle
will start in first gear and automatically
shift to second gear.
With the selector lever in L", the transmission is engaged in first gear.

Front drive control lever in H"
55km/h(34mph)
Front drive control lever in L4"
12km/h(7mph)

Front drive control lever in H"
2" . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118km/h (73 mph)
L" . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64km/h (40 mph)
Front drive control lever in L4"
2" . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 km/h (28 mph)
L" . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 km/h (15 mph)

110

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

z Do not continue hill climbing or
hard towing for a long time in the
2" or L" position. This may cause
severe automatic transmission damage from overheating. To prevent
such damage, D" position should
be used in hill climbing or hard
towing.

(g) Parking
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.
2. Pull the parking brake lever fully to
securely apply the parking brake.
3. With the brake pedal pressed down,
shift the selector lever to the P" position.

CAUTION
(f) Backing up
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.
2. With the brake pedal held down with
your foot, shift the selector lever to the
R" position.

Never attempt to move the selector
lever into P" position under any circumstances while the vehicle is moving. Serious mechanical damage and
loss of vehicle control may result.

CAUTION
Always keep your foot on the brake
pedal while stopped with the engine
running. This prevents the vehicle
from creeping.

NOTICE
Do not hold the vehicle on an upgrade with the accelerator pedal. It
can cause the transmission to overheat. Always use the brake pedal or
parking brake.

NOTICE
Never shift into reverse while the vehicle is moving.

(h) Good driving practice

When towing a trailer, in order to maintain engine braking efficiency, do not
use overdrive.

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

111

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

(i) Rocking your vehicle if stuck

z Do not race the engine and avoid
spinning the wheels.
z If your vehicle remains stuck after
rocking the vehicle several times,
consider other ways such as towing.

(j) Driving in PWR" (Power) mode
In the PWR" mode, the transmission is
shifted up and down at a higher vehicle
speed than in the NORM"(Normal) mode
and a more powerful acceleration is
achieved. To set the PWR" mode, push
in the driving pattern selector button. The
PWR" mode indicator light comes on.

NOTICE
If you rock your vehicle, observe the
following precautions to prevent damage to the transmission and other
parts.

For ordinary driving, Toyota recommends
using the NORM" mode to improve fuel
economy.

z Do not depress the accelerator pedal while shifting the selector lever
or before the transmission is completely shifted to forward or reverse
gear.

112

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

Four−wheel drive system
(a) Front drive control
(k) If you cannot shift the selector lever out of P" position

Use the front drive control lever, 4WD"
button and center differential lock
switch to select the transfer and center
differential modes.

If you cannot shift the selector lever from
the P" position even though the brake
pedal is depressed, use the shift lock
override lever. For instructions, see If you
cannot shift automatic transmission selector lever" in Section 4.

The H" and L4" position of the front
drive control lever provide either lock or
unlock the mode of the center differential.

H" (2WD) MODE

H" (4WD) MODE (center
differential unlock), L4"
MODE (center differential
unlock) or N" MODE
H" (4WD) MODE (center
differential lock), L4"
MODE (center differential
lock) or N" MODE

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

Use the center differential lock system if
your wheels get stuck in a ditch, or when
you are driving on a slippery or bumpy
surface. When the center differential is
locked, the vehicle skid control system is
automatically turned off and the center differential lock and VSC OFF" indicator
lights come on because the function that
controls engine performance interferes
with the process of freeing your wheels.

NOTICE
As soon as the center differential lock
switch is turned on, the VSC OFF"
indicator light comes on. After the
wheels are out of the ditch or off the
slippery or bumpy surface, turn the
center differential lock switch off.
Make sure that the center differential
lock indicator light and VSC OFF"
indicator light turn off.

113

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

H" mode (high speed position, two−
wheel drive): Front drive control lever at
H", 4WD" button left out
Use this for normal driving on dry hard−
surfaced roads. This position gives greater
economy, quietest ride and least wear and
better vehicle control.
H" mode (high speed position, four−
wheel drive, center differential unlocked): Front drive control lever at H",
4WD" button push in, center differential
lock switch left out
Use this for normal driving on all types of
roads, from dry hard−surfaced roads to
wet, icy or snow−covered roads. This
position provides greater traction than
two−wheel drive.
H" (high speed position, four−wheel
drive, center differential locked): Lever
at H", 4WD" button pushed in center
differential lock switch pushed in
Use this for greater traction when you
experience a loss of power, such as
wheel slipping, in the center differential
unlock mode.

N" mode (neutral position): Front drive
control lever at N"
No power is delivered to the wheels. The
vehicle must be stopped.
L4" (low speed position, four−wheel
drive, center differential unlocked):
Front drive control lever at L4", center
differential lock switch left out
Use this for maximum power and traction.
Use this for climbing steep hills, off−road
driving, and hard pulling in sand or mud.
In this mode, the braking feeling that occurs when the wheels are negotiating a
sharp corner is further reduced than in the
L4" (low position, four−wheel drive, center
differential locked) mode.
The transmission automatically shifts up
from second gear in this mode. This system is effective when starting your vehicle
in sand, mud, ice or snow. (However, the
transmission system may shift up from
first gear when the vehicle starts too
quickly.)

L4" mode (low speed position, four−
wheel drive, center differential locked):
Front drive control lever at L4", center
differential lock switch push in
Use this for maximum power and traction.
Use this for hard pulling in situations the
vehicle cannot negotiate even in the L4"
(low speed position, four−wheel drive, center differential unlocked) mode. Also, using
this mode when driving down steep off−
road inclines will help contribute to increased vehicle stability.
Four−wheel drive and center differential
lock indicator lights show which transfer
and center differential mode the vehicle is
in. Note that the differential is not still
locked as long as the indicator light remains off.
When the shifting has not been completed
within 3 seconds after the shifting operation, the indicator flashes. If the indicator
light does not go off when you push out
the center differential lock button, drive
straight ahead while accelerating or decelerating, or drive in reverse. If the indicator
flashes even if doing so, contact your
Toyota dealer as soon as possible. There
may be a trouble in the center differential
lock system.
See (c) Shifting procedure" for further instructions.

114

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

(b) A.D.D. (automatic
disconnecting differential)
Advice for driving on slippery roads in
L4" (low speed position) mode
If you shift the front drive control lever to
L4" and the automatic transmission lever
to 2" when you drive in steep off−road
areas, the output of the brake can be
controlled effectively by the active traction
control system, which assists the driver to
control the driving power of 4 wheels.

(As for the automatic transmission lever
positions, see Automatic transmission" in
this section.)

The A.D.D. can be engaged or disengaged by the shifting operations described in (c) Shifting procedure".
You should drive in four−wheel drive for
at least 16 km (10 miles) each month.
This will assure that the front drive components are lubricated.

Use the L" position of the automatic
transmission lever for maximum power
and traction when your wheels get stuck
or when you drive down a steep incline.
In the following cases, the output of the
brake can be controlled by the active traction control system if the engine speed is
under 3000 rpm (normally engine speed is
under 3000 rpm when the wheels get unstuck).

The front drive control lever in the L4"
position and the automatic transmission
lever in the L" position or the automatic transmission lever in the D" or 2"
with the transmission downshifting to
the first gear

The front drive control lever in the L4"
position and the automatic transmission
lever in the R" position

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

115

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

SHIFTING
BETWEEN
H"
(4WD,
UNLOCKED) AND H" (4WD LOCKED)

To shift from H" (2WD) mode to H"
(4WD) mode, reduce your speed to less
than 100 km/h (62 mph) and push in the
4WD" button.

To shift from H" (4WD, UNLOCKED) to
H" (4WD, LOCKED), push in the center
differential lock switch.

To shift from H" (4WD LOCKED) to
H" (4WD UNLOCKED), left out the center differential lock switch.
This can be done at any vehicle speed.
If the indicator light flashes when you left
out the center differential lock switch,
drive straight ahead while accelerating or
decelerating, or drive in reverse.

If the indicator light flashes when you
push in the 4WD" button, drive straight
ahead while accelerating or decelerating.

If the indicator light flashes when you
push in the center differential lock switch,
drive straight ahead while accelerating or
decelerating.

If the indicator light flashes and the buzzer sounds when you push in the 4WD"
button, reduce your speed or stop the
vehicle and reset.

If the indicator light flashes and the buzzer sounds when you push in the center
differential lock switch, reduce your speed
or stop the vehicle and reset.

Stop the vehicle and put the transmission
in N". With your foot holding down the
brake pedal, move the front drive control
lever.

CAUTION

Never push the 4WD" button if
wheels are slipping. Stop the slipping
or spinning before shifting.

Never push the center differential
lock button if wheels are slipping.
Stop the slipping or spinning before
shifting.

If the indicator light flashes when you
move the front drive control lever, drive
straight ahead while accelerating or decelerating.

To shift from H" (4WD) mode to H"
(2WD) mode, push the 4WD" button
again to turn it off.
This can be done at any vehicle speed.
If the indicator light flashes when you
push in the 4WD" button, drive straight
ahead while accelerating or decelerating,
or drive in reverse.

116

NOTICE
Do not drive on a dry paved surface
in H" (4WD, LOCKED) mode. This
may damage the locking mechanism
and the drive system.

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

SHIFTING BETWEEN H" AND L4"

CAUTION
Never move the front drive control
lever if wheels are slipping. Stop the
slipping or spinning before shifting.

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

Traction control system
(two−wheel drive models)
NOTICE

NOTICE

Do not drive on a dry paved surface
in L4" (LOCKED) mode. This may
damage the locking mechanism and
the drive system.

SHIFTING BETWEEN L4" (UNLOCKED)
AND L4" (LOCKED)
To shift between unlock and lock
modes in L", push the center differential
lock switch.
This can be done at any vehicle speed.
The traction control system automatically helps control the spinning of rear
wheels which may occur when accelerating on slippery road surfaces, by controlling the output of the brake and engine. Thus, the system assists driver to
control the driving power of rear
wheels.

If the indicator light flashes when you
push the center differential lock switch,
drive straight ahead while accelerating or
decelerating.

CAUTION
Never push the center differential
lock switch if wheels are slipping.
Stop the slipping or spinning before
shifting.

When you turn the ignition switch on, the
traction control system always turns on
automatically, and the slip indicator light
will come on. The indicator lights will go
off after about a few seconds.
If the slip indicator lights is left on after
the ignition is turned on, have your vehicle checked by your Toyota dealer as
soon as possible.
2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

117

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

Leave the system on during ordinary driving so that it can operate when needed.
When traction control is applied, the slip
indicator light blinks.
You may hear a sound in the engine
compartment for a few seconds when the
engine is started or just after the vehicle
is started. This means that the traction
control system is in the self−check mode,
and does not indicate malfunction. When
the traction control system is operating,
you may feel vibration or noise of your
vehicle, caused by operation of the
brakes. This indicates the system is functioning properly.
When getting the vehicle out of mud or
new snow, etc. the traction control system
will help operate to prevent the wheels
from spinning.

If your wheels get stuck in a ditch or
when you are driving on a slippery or
bumpy surface, turn off the traction control
system because its function that controls
engine performance interferes with the
process of freeing your wheels.

You can turn off the traction control
system by pushing the TRAC OFF"
switch. The TRAC OFF" indicator light
will come on. Pushing the TRAC OFF"
switch a second time turns on the traction control system again and the
TRAC OFF" indicator light will go off.
The traction control system will automatically go on, and the TRAC OFF" indicator
light will go off when you drive over 30
km/h (19 mph) even if the TRAC OFF"
switch is pushed to cancel the traction
control system.

118

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

Depressing the brake pedal repeatedly
may turn on the TRAC OFF" indicator
light and VSC/TRAC" warning light. It is
normal if it goes out after a few seconds.

Traction control system failure warning
These lights warn that when there is a
problem somewhere in the traction control
system.
If the TRAC OFF" indicator light and
VSC/TRAC" warning light come on, have
your vehicle checked by Toyota dealer as
soon as possible.
The lights will come on when the ignition
key is turned to ON", and will go off after
about a few seconds.
The lights may come on for 60 seconds
after the ignition key is turned to the ON"
position. It is normal if they go out after
a while.

The brake actuator temperature increases
during continuous operation of the traction
control system or vehicle skid control system such as on slippery roads. If the
brake actuator temperature becomes too
high while the traction control system or
vehicle skid control system is operating,
a buzzer will start to sound intermittently
to indicate that the traction control system
can no longer operate. In this case, immediately stop your vehicle at a safe place.
If the system continues to operate, the
buzzer sound changes from intermittent to
continuous.
(The
continuous
buzzer
sounds for about 3 seconds.) At the time
the VSC/TRAC" warning light will come
on and the traction control system temporarily stops operating in order to protect
the brake actuator. (Although the traction
control system does not operate, there is
no problem to continue your driving.) The
system will be automatically restored after
a short time and the VSC/TRAC" warning
light goes out.

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

When the VSC/TRAC" warning light and
TRAC OFF" indicator light come on the
traction control system does not operate,
but there is no problem to continue your
driving.
In the following cases, contact your Toyota
dealer:

The VSC/TRAC" warning light and
TRAC OFF" indicator light do not
come on after the ignition is turned to
on.

The VSC/TRAC" warning light TRAC
OFF" indicator light are left on after the
ignition is turned to on.

CAUTION
Under certain slippery road conditions, full traction of the vehicle and
power to the rear wheels can not be
maintained, even though the traction
control system is in operation. Do not
drive the vehicle under any speed or
maneuvering conditions which will
cause the vehicle to lose traction. In
situations where the road surface is
covered with ice or snow, your vehicle should be fitted with snow tires
or tire chains. Always drive at appropriate and cautious pace.

119

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

Active traction control
system
(four−wheel drive models)
If the slip indicator light is left on after
the ignition is turn on, have your vehicle
checked by your Toyota dealer as soon as
possible.
When the active traction control is applied, the slip indicator light blinks.

The active traction control system automatically helps control the spinning of
4 wheels (four−wheel drive mode) or
rear wheels (two−wheel drive mode)
which may occur when accelerating on
slippery road surfaces, by controlling
the output of the brake and engine.
Thus, the system assists driver to control the driving power of 4 wheels
(four−wheel drive mode) or rear wheels
(two−wheel drive mode).

You may hear a sound in the engine
compartment for a few seconds when the
engine is started or just after the vehicle
is started. This means that the active
traction control system is in the self−
check mode, and does not indicate malfunction. When the traction control system
is operating, you may feel vibration or
noise of your vehicle, caused by operation
of the brakes. This indicates the system
is functioning properly.
When getting the vehicle out of mud or
new snow, etc. the active traction control
system will help operate to prevent the
wheels from spinning.

These lights warn that when there is a
problem somewhere in the active traction
control system.
If the VSC OFF" indicator light and VSC/
TRAC" warning light come on, have your
vehicle checked by Toyota dealer as soon
as possible.
The lights will come on when the ignition
key is turned to ON", and will go off after
about a few seconds.

When you turn the ignition switch on, the
active traction control system always turns
on automatically, and the slip indicator
light will come on. The indicator lights will
go off after about a few seconds.

120

Active traction control system failure
warning

The lights may come on for 60 seconds
after the ignition key is turned to the ON"
position. It is normal if they go out after
a while.
2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

Depressing the brake pedal repeatedly
may turn on the VSC OFF" indicator light
and VSC/TRAC" warning light. It is normal if it goes out after a few seconds.
The brake actuator temperature increases
during continuous operation of the active
traction control system or vehicle skid
control system such as on slippery roads.
If the brake actuator temperature becomes
too high while the active traction control
system or vehicle skid control system is
operating, a buzzer will start to sound
intermittently to indicate that the active
traction control system can no longer operate. In this case, immediately stop your
vehicle at a safe place. If the system
continues to operate, the buzzer sound
changes from intermittent to continuous.
(The continuous buzzer sounds for about
3 seconds.) At the time, the VSC/TRAC"
warning light will come on and the active
traction control system temporarily stops
operating in order to protect the brake
actuator. (Although the active traction control system does not operate, there is no
problem to continue your driving.) The
system will be automatically restored after
a short time and the VSC/TRAC" warning
light goes out.

When the VSC/TRAC" warning light and
VSC OFF" indicator light come on the
active traction control system does not
operate, but there is no problem to continue your driving.
In the following cases, contact your Toyota
dealer:

The VSC/TRAC" warning light and
VSC OFF" indicator light do not come
on after the ignition is turned to on.

The VSC/TRAC" warning light and
VSC OFF" indicator light are left on
after the ignition is turned to on.

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

CAUTION
Under certain slippery road conditions, full traction of the vehicle and
power to the 4 wheels (four−wheel
drive mode) or rear wheels (two−
wheel drive mode) can not be maintained, even though the traction control system is in operation. Do not
drive the vehicle under any speed or
maneuvering conditions which will
cause the vehicle to lose traction. In
situations where the road surface is
covered with ice or snow, your vehicle should be fitted with snow tires
or tire chains. Always drive at appropriate and cautious pace.

121

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

Vehicle skid control system
If the vehicles is going to skid during
driving, the slip indicator light flashes and
an alarm sounds intermittently.
The vehicle skid control activates when
the vehicle speed is more than 15 km/h
(9 mph).
You may hear a sound in the engine
compartment for a few seconds when the
engine is started or just after the vehicle
is started. This means that the vehicle
stability control is in the self−check mode
and does not indicate a malfunction.
The vehicle skid control system helps
to provide comprehensive control of the
systems such as anti−lock brakes, traction control, engine control, etc. This
system automatically controls the output of the brakes or engine to help
prevent the vehicle from skidding under
adverse condition.

Four−wheel drive models only
This switch can function only when the
four−wheel drive system is selected.
You can turn off the vehicle skid control system by pushing the center differential lock switch. The VSC OFF"
and center differential lock indicator
lights will come on. Pushing the center
differential lock switch a second time
turns on the system again. The VSC
OFF" and center differential lock indicator lights will go off.

When you turn the ignition switch on, the
slip indicator light will come on. The slip
indicator light will go off after about a few
seconds.
If the slip indicator light is left on after
the ignition is tuned on, have your vehicle
checked by your Toyota dealer as soon as
possible.

122

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

If your wheels get stuck in a ditch or
when you are driving on severe off road
and sand, turn off the vehicle skid control
system because its function that controls
engine performance interferes with the
process of freeing your wheels.

Vehicle skid
warning

control

system

failure

These lights warn that when there is a
problem somewhere in the vehicle skid
control system, traction control system
(two−wheel drive models), active traction
control system (four−wheel drive models).

NOTICE
Make sure that the center differential
lock indicator light goes off before
normal driving.

Two−wheel drive models

If the VSC/TRAC" warning light and
TRAC OFF" (two−wheel drive models) or
VSC OFF" (four−wheel drive models) indicator light come on, have your vehicle
checked by Toyota dealer as soon as possible. However, it is no problem that the
VSC/TRAC" warning light comes on when
the brake actuator temperature becomes
high. (For details, see Traction control
system" and Active traction control system" in this section.)
The VSC/TRAC" warning light and TRAC
OFF" (two−wheel drive models) or VSC
OFF" (four−wheel drive models) indicator
light will come on when the ignition key
is turned to ON", and will go off after
about a few seconds.
The lights may come on for 60 seconds
after the ignition key is turned to the ON"
position. It is normal if they go out after
a while.

Four−wheel drive models
2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

123

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

Parking brake
Depressing the brake pedal repeatedly
may turn on VSC/TRAC" warning light
and TRAC OFF" (two−wheel drive models) or VSC OFF" (four−wheel drive models) indicator light. It is normal if they go
out after a few seconds.
When the VSC/TRAC" warning light and
TRAC OFF" (two−wheel drive models) or
VSC OFF" (four−wheel drive models) indicator light come on, the vehicle skid control system does not operate, but there is
no problem to continue your driving.
In the following cases, contact your Toyota
dealer:

The VSC/TRAC" warning light and
TRAC OFF" (two−wheel drive models)
or VSC OFF" (four−wheel drive models) indicator light do not come on after the ignition is turned to on.

The VSC/TRAC" warning light and
TRAC OFF" (two−wheel drive models)
or VSC OFF" (four−wheel drive models) indicator light are left on after the
ignition is turned to on.

124

CAUTION

Active traction control system, vehicle skid control system and anti−
lock brake system are electronic
systems designed to help the driver
maintain control under adverse conditions. They are not a substitute
for safe driving practices. Factors
including speed, road conditions
and driver steering input can all affect whether active traction control
system, vehicle skid control system
and anti−lock brake system will be
effective in preventing a loss of
control. Always keep safety driving
in mind. If the slip indicator light
flashes, sounding an alarm, special
care should be taken while driving.

Only use tires of specified size. The
size, manufacture, brand and tread
pattern for all 4 tires should be the
same. If you use the tires other
than specified, or different type or
size, the vehicle skid control system may not function correctly.
When replacing the tires or wheels,
contact your Toyota dealer. (See
Checking and replacing tires" in
Section 7−2.)
2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

When parking, firmly apply the parking
brake to avoid inadvertent creeping.
To set: Pull up the lever. For better holding power, first depress the brake pedal
and hold it while setting the parking
brake.
To release: Pull up the lever slightly (1),
press the lock release button (2), and lower (3).
To remind you that the parking brake is
set, the parking brake reminder light in
the instrument panel remains on until you
release the parking brake.

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

Cruise control
CAUTION
Before driving, be sure the parking
brake is fully released and the parking brake reminder light is off.

The cruise control allows you to cruise
the vehicle at a desired speed over 40
km/h (25 mph) even with your foot off
the accelerator pedal.
Your cruising speed can be maintained up
or down grades within the limits of engine
performance, although a slight speed
change may occur when driving up or
down the grades. On steeper hills, a
greater speed change will occur so it is
better to drive without the cruise control.

CAUTION

To help maintain maximum control
of your vehicle, do not use the
cruise control when driving in
heavy or varying traffic, or on slippery (rainy, icy or snow−covered) or
winding roads.

Avoid vehicle speed increases when
driving downhill. If the vehicle
speed is too fast in relation to the
cruise control set speed, cancel the
cruise control then downshift the
transmission to use engine braking
to slow down.

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

TURNING ON THE SYSTEM
To operate the cruise control, press the
CRUISE ON−OFF" button. This turns the
system on. The indicator light in the
instrument panel shows that you can now
set the vehicle at a desired cruising
speed. Another press will turn the system
completely off.

CAUTION
To avoid accidental cruise control engagement, keep the CRUISE ON−
OFF" switch off when not using the
cruise control.

125

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

If you need accelerationfor example,
when passingdepress the accelerator
pedal enough for the vehicle to exceed
the set speed. When you release it, the
vehicle will return to the speed set prior
to the acceleration.

RESETTING TO A FASTER SPEED

CANCELLING THE PRESET SPEED

However, a faster way to reset is to accelerate the vehicle and then push the
lever down in the SET/COAST" direction.

You can cancel the preset speed by:
a. Pulling the lever in the
direction and releasing it.

CANCEL"

b. Depressing the brake pedal.
SETTING AT A DESIRED SPEED
The transmission must be in D" before
you set the cruise control speed.
Bring your vehicle to the desired speed,
push the lever down in the SET/COAST"
direction and release it. This sets the vehicle at that speed. If the speed is not
satisfactory, tap the lever up for a faster
speed, or tap it down for a slower speed.
Each tap changes the set speed by 1.6
km/h (1.0 mph). You can now take your
foot off the accelerator pedal.

126

If the vehicle speed falls below about 40
km/h (25 mph), the preset speed will automatically cancel out.
If the vehicle speed drops 16 km/h (10
mph) below the preset speed, the preset
speed will also automatically cancel out.
If the preset speed automatically cancels
out other than for the above cases, have
your vehicle checked by your Toyota dealer at the earliest opportunity.

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

Push the lever up in the RES/ACC" direction and hold it. Release the lever when
the desired speed is attained. While the
lever is held up, the vehicle will gradually
gain speed.

RESETTING TO A SLOWER SPEED
Push the lever down in the SET/COAST"
direction and hold it. Release the lever
when the desired speed is attained. While
the lever is held down, the vehicle speed
will gradually decrease.
However, a faster way to reset is to depress the brake pedal and then push the
lever down in the SET/COAST" direction.
Even if you turn off the overdrive switch,
with the cruise control on, engine braking
will not be applied because the cruise
control is not cancelled. To decrease the
vehicle speed, reset to a slower speed
with the cruise control lever or depress
the brake pedal. If you use the brake
pedal, cruise control is cancelled.

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

RESUMING THE PRESET SPEED
If the preset speed is cancelled by pulling
the control lever or by depressing the
brake pedal or clutch pedal, pushing the
lever up in the RES/ACC" direction will
restore the speed set prior to cancellation.
However, once the vehicle speed falls below about 40 km/h (25 mph), the preset
speed will not be resumed.
CRUISE CONTROL FAILURE WARNING
If the CRUISE" indicator light in the
instrument cluster flashes when using the
cruise control, press the CRUISE ON−
OFF" button to turn the system off and
then press it again to turn it on.
If any of the following conditions then occurs, there is some trouble in the cruise
control system.

The indicator light does not come on.
The indicator light flashes again.
The indicator light goes out after it
comes on.
If this is the case, contact your Toyota
dealer and have your vehicle inspected.

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

127

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

128

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

SECTION

1− 7

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND
CONTROLS
Car audio system
Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Using your audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Car audio system operating hints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

129

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

Reference

Type 1: AM·FM ETR radio/cassette player
(with compact disc auto changer controller)

130

Type 2: AM·FM ETR radio/cassette player
compact disc player (with compact disc
auto changer controller)

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

Type 3: AM·FM ETR radio/cassette player/
compact disc auto changer

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

Using your audio system
Some basics
This section describes some of the basic
features on Toyota audio systems. Some
information may not pertain to your system.

TONE AND BALANCE

YOUR RADIO ANTENNA

For details about your system’s tone and
balance controls, see the description of
your own system.

Your vehicle has a mast type antenna.

Your audio system works when the ignition
key is in the ACC" or ON" position.

Tone

TURNING THE SYSTEM ON AND OFF
Push PWR·VOL" or PWR/VOL" to turn
the audio system on and off.
Push AM", FM1·2", TAPE" or CD" to
turn on that function without pushing
PWR·VOL" or PWR/VOL".
You can turn on each player by inserting
a cassette tape or compact disc.
You can turn off each player by ejecting
the cassette tape or compact disc. If the
audio system was previously off, then the
entire audio system will be turned off
when you eject the cassette tape or compact disc. If the another function was previously playing, it will come on again.

How good an audio program sounds to
you is largely determined by the mix of
the treble, midrange, and bass levels. In
fact, different kinds of music and vocal
programs usually sound better with different mixes of treble, midrange, and bass.

Detachable antenna
To remove an detachable antenna, carefully turn it counterclockwise.

NOTICE
To prevent damage to the antenna,
make sure it is removed before driving your Toyota through an automatic
car wash.

Balance
A good balance of the left and right stereo
channels and of the front and rear sound
levels is also important.
Keep in mind that if you are listening to
a stereo recording or broadcast, changing
the right/left balance will increase the volume of one group of sounds while decreasing the volume of another.

SWITCHING BETWEEN FUNCTIONS

Power antenna
To lower a power antenna, turn off the
audio system by pushing PWR·VOL" or
PWR/VOL", or turn the ignition key to
LOCK".
The power antenna automatically retracts
when the radio mode is switched off to
turn on the cassette tape player.

NOTICE

Push AM", FM1·2", TAPE" or CD" if the
system is already on but you want to
switch from one function to another.

To prevent damage to the antenna,
make sure it is retracted before driving your Toyota through an automatic
car wash.

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

131

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

YOUR CASSETTE PLAYER
When you insert a cassette, the exposed
tape should be to the right.

NOTICE
Do not oil any part of the player and
do not insert anything other than cassette tapes into the slot, or the tape
player may be damaged.
YOUR COMPACT DISC PLAYER
When you insert a disc, gently push it in
with the label side up. (The player will
automatically eject a disc if the label side
is down.) The compact disc player will
play from track 1 through the end of the
disc. Then it will play from track 1 again.

NOTICE
Never try to disassemble or oil any
part of the compact disc player. Do
not insert anything except a compact
disc into the slot.
The player is intended for use with 12 cm
(4.7 in.) discs only.

132

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

Controls and features
Type 1
Details of specific buttons, controls, and
features are described in the alphabetical
listing that follows.

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

133

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

1 2 3 4 5 6 (Preset buttons)
These buttons are used to preset and
tune in radio stations.
To preset a station to a button: Tune in
the desired station (see TUNE" knob or
SEEK" button). Push and hold down the
button until you hear a beepthis will set
the station to the button. The button number will appear on the display.
To tune in to a preset station: Push the
button for the station you want. The button number and station frequency will appear on the display.
These systems can store one AM and two
FM stations for each button (The display
will show AM", FM1" or FM2" when you
push AM" FM1·2").
(Eject button)
Push the cassette tape eject button to
eject a cassette. Push the compact disc
eject button to eject a compact disc.
After you turn the ignition to LOCK", you
will be able to eject a cassette or disc but
you will not be able to reinsert it.

134

(Program)
Push
" to select the other side of a
cassette tape. The display indicates which
side is currently selected ( " indicates
top side,

" indicates bottom side).

Auto−reverse feature: After the cassette
player reaches the end of a tape side, it
automatically reverses and begins to play
the other side. This is true whether the
cassette was playing or fast forwarding.
(Reverse/Fast forward buttons)
Cassette Player
Push the fast forward button to fast forward a cassette tape. FF" will appear on
the display. Push the reverse button to
rewind a tape. REW" will appear on the
display.
To stop the tape while it is fast forwarding, push the fast forward button or
TAPE"; to stop the tape while it is rewinding, push the reverse button or
TAPE".
If a tape side rewinds completely, the cassette player will stop and then play that
same side. If a tape fast forwards completely, the cassette player will play the
other side of the tape, using the auto−reverse feature.
2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

Compact Disc Player
If you want to fast forward or reverse
through a compact disc track, push and
hold in the fast forward or reverse button.
When you release the button, the compact
disc player will resume playing.
AM
Push AM" to turn on the radio and select
the AM band. AM" will appear on the
display.
If the audio system is off, you can turn
on the radio by pushing AM". Also, push
AM" to switch from cassette or compact
disc operation to radio operation.
CTRL / MODE (Audio control and mode
adjustment)
Manual tone adjustment function
This knob is used to adjust the tone
manually.
For low−pitch tone adjustment, push
CTRL / MODE" repeatedly until BAS"
appears on the display. Then turn the
knob to suit your preference.
The display will show the range from
BAS −5" to BAS 5".

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

For high−pitch tone adjustment, push
CTRL / MODE" repeatedly until TRE"
appears on the display. Then turn the
knob to suit your preference.
The display will show the range from
TRE −5" to TRE 5".
Sound balance adjustment function
This knob is also used to adjust the
sound balance between the front and rear,
and the right and left speakers.
For front/rear adjustment, push CTRL /
MODE" repeatedly until FAd" appears on
the display. Then turn the knob to adjust
the front/rear balance.
The display will show the range from
FAd−F7" to FAd−R7".
For left/right adjustment, push CTRL /
MODE" repeatedly until BAL" appears on
the display. Then turn the knob to adjust
the left/right balance.
The display will show the range from
BAL−L7" to BAL−R7".

CD (Compact Disc)
Push CD" to switch from radio or cassette operation to compact disc operation.
If the audio system is off, you can turn
on the compact disc player by pushing
CD". In both cases, a disc must already
be loaded in the player.
When the audio is set into compact disc
operation, the display shows the track or,
track and disc number currently being
played. Each time you push CD", the
system changes to the automatic changer.
If the player malfunctions, your audio system will display one of the six following
error messages.
If WAIT" appears on the display, it indicates that the inside of the player unit
may be too hot due to the very high ambient temperature. Remove the disc or magazine from the player and allow the player
to cool down.
If Err 1" appears on the display, it
indicates the disc is dirty, damaged, or it
was inserted up−side down. Clean the
disc or insert it correctly.
If Err 2" appears on the display, it
indicates no disc is loaded inside the
magazine. Insert a disc.

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

If Err 3" or Err 4" appears on the
display, it indicates there is a trouble inside the system. Eject the disc or magazine. Set the disc or magazine again.
If OPEn" appears on the display, it
indicates the compact disc auto changer
lid is open. Close the compact disc auto
changer lid.
If the malfunction is not rectified, take
your vehicle to your Toyota dealer.
DISC ƝƜ
Compact disc auto changer only
By using this button, you can select a
disc you wish to listen to.
Push either side of the button until the
number of the disc you want to listen to
appears on the display.
Dolby

B NR∗

135

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

∗ : Dolby noise reduction manufactured under license from
Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. DOLBY" and the
double D symbol
are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories
Licensing Corporation.

FM1·2
Push FM1·2" to turn on the radio and
select the FM band. FM1" or FM2" will
appear on the display. This system allows
you to set twelve FM stations, two for
each button.
If the audio system is off, you can turn
on the radio by pushing FM1·2". Also,
push FM1·2" to switch from cassette or
compact disc operation to radio operation.
PWR/VOL (Power/Volume)
Push PWR/VOL" to turn the audio system
on and off. Turn PWR/VOL" to adjust the
volume.
RAND (Random)
There are two random featuresyou can
either listen to the tracks on all the compact discs in the magazine in random order, or only listen to the tracks on a
specific compact disc in random order.

To randomly play the tracks on a disc:
Quickly push and release RAND". RAND"
will appear on the display. The disc you
are listening to will play in random order.
If you hear a beep, you held the button
too long, and the player will play all the
tracks in the magazine in random order.
To turn off the random feature, push
RAND" again.
Compact disc auto changer only
To randomly play all the tracks in the
magazine:
Push and hold RAND" until you hear a
beep.
·RAND" will appear on the display and the player will perform all the
tracks on all the discs in the magazine in
random order. To turn off the random feature, push RAND" again.
RPT (Repeat)
Cassette Player
Push RPT" while the track is playing.
RPT" will appear on the display. When
the track ends, it will automatically be
rewound and replayed. This process will
be continued until you push the button
again to turn off the repeat feature.
There must be at least 3 seconds of blank
space between tracks in order for the repeat feature to work correctly.

136

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

Compact Disc Player
There are two repeat featuresyou can
either replay a disc track or a whole compact disc.
Repeating a track:
Quickly push and release RPT" while the
track is playing. RPT" will appear on the
display. If you hear a beep, you held the
button too long, and the player will repeat
the whole disc. When the track ends, it
will automatically be replayed. This process will be continued until you push the
button again to turn off the repeat feature.
Compact disc auto changer only
Repeating a disc:
Push and hold RPT" until you hear a
beep.
·RPT" will appear on the display. The player will repeat all the tracks
on the disc you are listening to. When the
disc ends, the player will automatically go
back to the top track of the disc and
replay. This process will be continued until
you push the button again to turn off the
repeat feature.

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

SCAN
Radio
You can either scan all the frequencies on
a band or scan only the preset stations
for that band.
To scan the preset stations:
Push and hold SCAN" until you hear a
beep. The radio will tune in the next preset station up the band, stay there for 5
seconds, and then move to the next preset station. To select a station, push
SCAN" again.
To scan all the frequencies:
Quickly push and release SCAN". If you
hear a beep, you held the button too long,
and the radio will scan the preset stations. The radio will find the next station
up the station band, stay there for 5 seconds, and then scan again. To select a
station, push SCAN" again.
Compact disc player
There are two scan featuresyou can either scan the tracks on a specific disc or
scan the first tracks of all the discs in the
magazine.

Scanning the tracks on a disc:
Quickly push and release SCAN". SCAN"
will appear on the display and the player
will scan all the tracks on the disc you
are listening to. If you hear a beep, you
held the button too long, and the player
will scan the first track of all the discs in
the magazine. To select a track, push
SCAN" again. If the player scanned all
the tracks on the disc, it will stop scanning.
Compact disc auto changer only
Scanning the first track of all the discs in
the magazine:
Push SCAN" until you hear a beep.

Cassette Player
By using this button, you can skip up or
down to a different track.
You can skip up to nine tracks at a time.
Push the up or down side of the button.
FF 1" or REW 1" will appear on the
display.
Next, push either side of
until the number on the
the number of tracks you
you push the button ten
feature will be turned off.

the track button
display reaches
want to skip. If
times, the skip

Radio

If you have pushed the track button more
than you wanted to, push the other side
of the button. The track number will be
reduced.

In the seek mode, the radio finds and
plays the next station up or down the
station band.

The track number you select is not valid
if it is higher than the number of tracks
remaining on the current cassette side.

To seek a station, quickly push and release the Ɯ" or Ɲ" under the SEEK".
Do this again to find another station.

After the beginning of the tape is

SEEK (Seeking)

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

reached, the player will automatically
start playing the same side.

137

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

After the end of the tape is reached,
the player will automatically reverse
sides and start playing the other side.
There must be at least 3 seconds of blank
space between tracks for the track button
to work correctly. In addition, the feature
may not work well with some spoken
word, live, or classical recordings.
ST (Stereo reception) display
Your radio automatically changes to stereo
reception when a stereo broadcast is received. ST" appears on the display. If the
signal becomes weak, the radio reduces
the amount of channel separation to prevent the weak signal from creating noise.
If the signal becomes extremely weak, the
radio switches from stereo to mono reception.

TRACK (Track up/down button):
Compact disc player
By using this button, you can skip up or
down to a different track.
Push either side of the track button until
the number of the track you want to listen
to appears on the display. If you want to
return to the beginning of the current
track, push the down side of the button
one time, quickly.
TUNE (Tuning)
Your Toyota has an electronic tuning radio
(ETR). Turn the knob clockwise to step up
the frequency. Turn the knob counterclockwise to step down the frequency.

138

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

Type 2
Details of specific buttons, controls, and
features are described in the alphabetical
listing that follows.

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

139

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

140

(Program)
Push
" to select the other side of a
cassette tape. The display indicates which
side is currently selected ( " indicates
top side,

" indicates bottom side).

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

If a tape side rewinds completely, the cassette player will stop and then play that
same side. If a tape fast forwards completely, the cassette player will play the
other side of the tape, using the auto−reverse feature.
Compact Disc Player
If you want to fast forward or reverse
through a compact disc track, push and
hold in the fast forward or reverse button.
When you release the button, the compact
disc player will resume playing.
AM
Push AM" to turn on the radio and select
the AM band. AM" will appear on the
display.
If the audio system is off, you can turn
on the radio by pushing AM". Also, push
AM" to switch from cassette or compact
disc operation to radio operation.

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

CONTROL / MODE (Audio control and
mode adjustment)
Manual tone adjustment function
This knob is used to adjust the tone
manually.
For low−pitch tone adjustment, push
CONTROL / MODE" repeatedly until
BAS" appears on the display. Then turn
the knob to suit your preference.
The display will show the range from
BAS −5" to BAS 5".
For middle−pitch tone adjustment, push
CONTROL / MODE" repeatedly until MId"
appears on the display. Then turn the
knob to suit your preference.
The display will show the range from MId
−5" to MId 5".
For high−pitch tone adjustment, push
CONTROL / MODE" repeatedly until
TRE" appears on the display. Then turn
the knob to suit your preference.
The display will show the range from
TRE −5" to TRE 5".
Sound balance adjustment function
This knob is also used to adjust the
sound balance between the front and rear,
and the right and left speakers.

The display will show the range from
FAd−F7" to FAd−R7".

For left/right adjustment, push CONTROL
/ MODE" repeatedly until BAL" appears
on the display. Then turn the knob to
adjust the left/right balance.

If Err 1" appears on the display, it
indicates the disc is dirty, damaged, or it
was inserted up−side down. Clean the
disc or insert it correctly.

The display will show the range from
BAL−L7" to BAL−R7".

If Err 2" appears on the display, it
indicates no disc is loaded inside the
magazine. Insert a disc.

For front/rear adjustment, push CONTROL
/ MODE" repeatedly until FAd" appears
on the display. Then turn the knob to
adjust the front/rear balance.

If the player malfunctions, your audio system will display one of the six following
error messages.

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

141

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

DISC ƝƜ
Compact disc auto changer only
By using this button, you can select a
disc you wish to listen to.
Push either side of the button until the
number of the disc you want to listen to
appears on the display.
Dolby

B NR∗

If you are listening to a tape that was
recorded with Dolby B Noise Reduction,
push the button marked with the double−D
symbol. The double−D symbol will appear
on the display. Push the button again to
turn off Dolby B NR.
The Dolby NR mode reduces tape noise
by about 10 dB. For best sound reproduction, play your tapes with this button on
or off according to the mode used for
recording the tape.
∗ : Dolby noise reduction manufactured under license from
Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. DOLBY" and the
double D symbol
are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories
Licensing Corporation.

FM1·2

If the audio system is off, you can turn
on the radio by pushing FM1·2". Also,
push FM1·2" to switch from cassette or
compact disc operation to radio operation.
PWR·VOL (Power and Volume)
Push PWR·VOL" to turn the audio system
on and off. Turn PWR·VOL" to adjust the
volume.
RAND (Random)
There are two random featuresyou can
either listen to the tracks on all the compact discs in the magazine in random order, or only listen to the tracks on a
specific compact disc in random order.
To randomly play the tracks on a disc:
Quickly push and release
".
"
will appear on the display. The disc you
are listening to will play in random order.
If you hear a beep, you held the button
too long, and the player will play all the
tracks in the magazine in random order.
To turn off the random feature, push this
button again.

Push FM1·2" to turn on the radio and
select the FM band. FM1" or FM2" will
appear on the display. This system allows
you to set twelve FM stations, two for
each button.

142

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

Compact disc auto changer only
To randomly play all the tracks in the
magazine:
" until you hear a
Push and hold
" will appear on the disbeep.
play and the player will perform all the
tracks on all the discs in the magazine in
random order. To turn off the random feature, push this button again.
RPT (Repeat)
Cassette Player
" while the track is playing.
Push
" will appear on the display. When

the track ends, it will automatically be
rewound and replayed. This process will
be continued until you push the button
again to turn off the repeat feature.
There must be at least 3 seconds of blank
space between tracks in order for the repeat feature to work correctly.

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

Compact Disc Player

SCAN

Compact disc player

There are two repeat featuresYou can
either replay a disc track or a whole compact disc.

Radio

There are two scan featuresyou can either scan the tracks on a specific disc or
scan the first tracks of all the discs in the
magazine.

Repeating a track:
Quickly push and release
" while the
track is playing.
" will appear on the
display. If you hear a beep, you held the
button too long, and the player will repeat
the whole disc. When the track ends, it
will automatically be replayed. This process will be continued until you push the
button again to turn off the repeat feature.
Compact disc auto changer only
Repeating a disc:
Push and hold

" until you hear a

" will appear on the display.
beep.
The player will repeat all the tracks on the
disc you are listening to. When the disc
ends, the player will automatically go back
to the top track of the disc and replay.
This process will be continued until you
push the button again to turn off the repeat feature.

You can either scan all the frequencies on
a band or scan only the preset stations
for that band.
To scan the preset stations:
Push and hold SCAN" until you hear a
beep. The radio will tune in the next preset station up the band, stay there for 5
seconds, and then move to the next preset station. To select a station, push
SCAN" again.
To scan all the frequencies:
Quickly push and release SCAN". If you
hear a beep, you held the button too long,
and the radio will scan the preset stations. The radio will find the next station
up the station band, stay there for 5 seconds, and then scan again. To select a
station, push SCAN" again.

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

143

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

SEEK (Seeking)
Radio
In the seek mode, the radio finds and
plays the next station up or down the
station band.
To seek a station, quickly push and release the Ɯ" or Ɲ" under the SEEK".
Do this again to find another station.
Cassette Player
By using this button, you can skip up or
down to a different track.
You can skip up to nine tracks at a time.
Push the up or down side of the button.
FF 1" or REW 1" will appear on the
display.
Next, push either side of
until the number on the
the number of tracks you
you push the button ten
feature will be turned off.

the track button
display reaches
want to skip. If
times, the skip

144

If you have pushed the track button more
than you wanted to, push the other side
of the button. The track number will be
reduced.
The track number you select is not valid
if it is higher than the number of tracks
remaining on the current cassette side.

After the beginning of the tape is
reached, the player will automatically
start playing the same side.

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

TAPE
Push TAPE" to switch from radio or compact disc operation to cassette operation.
If the audio system is off, you can turn
on the cassette player by pushing TAPE".
In both cases, a cassette must already be
loaded in the player.
TRACK (Track up/down button):
Compact disc player
By using this button, you can skip up or
down to a different track.
Push either side of the track button until
the number of the track you want to listen
to appears on the display. If you want to
return to the beginning of the current
track, push the down side of the button
one time, quickly.
TUNE (Tuning)
Your Toyota has an electronic tuning radio
(ETR). Turn the knob clockwise to step up
the frequency. Turn the knob counterclockwise to step down the frequency.

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

Type 3
Details of specific buttons, controls, and
features are described in the alphabetical
listing that follows.

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

145

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

1 2 3 4 5 6 (Preset buttons)

Compact disc

These buttons are used to preset and
tune in radio stations.

To eject one compact disc only: Push and
release the compact disc eject button. If
you hold the button too long (if the audio
system is on at this time, you hear a
beep.), the mechanism will change to the
mode for ejecting all the discs loaded in
the changer. You can also eject any specific one of the discs loaded in the changer as follows:
1. Push either side of the DISC" button
until the number of the disc you want
to eject is displayed.
2. Push and release the compact disc
eject button.

To preset a station to a button: Tune in
the desired station (see TUNE" knob or
SEEK" button). Push and hold down the
button until you hear a beepthis will set
the station to the button. The button number will appear on the display.
To tune in to a preset station: Push the
button for the station you want. The button number and station frequency will appear on the display.
These systems can store one AM and two
FM stations for each button (The display
will show AM", FM1" or FM2" when you
push AM" FM1·2").
(Eject button)
Cassette tape
Push the cassette tape eject button to
eject a cassette.
After you turn the ignition to LOCK", you
will be able to eject a cassette, but you
will not be able to reinsert it.

146

To eject all the discs loaded in the changer: Push and hold the compact disc eject
button (until you hear a beep when the
audio system is on). The last compact
disc played before pushing the button will
be ejected first. If a disc is left in the slot
for a long time, the function to eject all
the discs will be automatically cancelled.
After you turn the ignition to LOCK", you
will be able to eject one compact disc
only or all the discs loaded in the changer, but you will not be able to reinsert it
or them.

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

(Program)
Push
" to select the other side of a
cassette tape. The display indicates which
side is currently selected ( " indicates
top side,

" indicates bottom side).

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

CONTROL / MODE (Audio control and
mode adjustment)

Compact Disc Player

For low−pitch tone adjustment, push
CONTROL / MODE" repeatedly until
BAS" appears on the display. Then turn
the knob to suit your preference.

If you want to fast forward or reverse
through a compact disc track, push and
hold in the fast forward or reverse button.
When you release the button, the compact
disc player will resume playing.
AM
Push AM" to turn on the radio and select
the AM band. AM" will appear on the
display.
If the audio system is off, you can turn
on the radio by pushing AM". Also, push
AM" to switch from cassette or compact
disc operation to radio operation.

Manual tone adjustment function
This knob is used to adjust the tone
manually.

The display will show the range from
BAS −5" to BAS 5".
For middle−pitch tone adjustment, push
CONTROL / MODE" repeatedly until MId"
appears on the display. Then turn the
knob to suit your preference.
The display will show the range from MId
−5" to MId 5".
For high−pitch tone adjustment, push
CONTROL / MODE" repeatedly until
TRE" appears on the display. Then turn
the knob to suit your preference.
The display will show the range from
TRE −5" to TRE 5".
Sound balance adjustment function
This knob is also used to adjust the
sound balance between the front and rear,
and the right and left speakers.
2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

For front/rear adjustment, push CONTROL
/ MODE" repeatedly until FAd" appears
on the display. Then turn the knob to
adjust the front/rear balance.
The display will show the range from
FAd−F7" to FAd−R7".
For left/right adjustment, push CONTROL
/ MODE" repeatedly until BAL" appears
on the display. Then turn the knob to
adjust the left/right balance.
The display will show the range from
BAL−L7" to BAL−R7".
CD (Compact Disc)
Push CD" to switch from radio or cassette operation to compact disc operation.
If the audio system is off, you can turn
on the compact disc player by pushing
CD". In both cases, a disc must already
be loaded in the player.
When the audio is set into compact disc
operation, the display shows the track or,
track and disc number currently being
played.
If the player or another unit equipped with
the player malfunctions, your audio system
will display one of the six following error
messages.

147

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

If WAIT" appears on the display, it indicates that the inside of the player unit
may be too hot due to the very high ambient temperature. Remove the disc or magazine from the player and allow the player
to cool down.
If Err 1" appears on the display, it
indicates the disc is dirty, damaged, or it
was inserted up−side down. Clean the
disc or insert it correctly.
If Err 2" appears on the display, it
indicates no disc is loaded inside the
magazine. Insert a disc.
If Err 3" or Err 4" appears on the
display, it indicates there is a trouble inside the system. Eject the disc or magazine. Set the disc or magazine again.
If OPEn" appears on the display, it
indicates the compact disc auto changer
lid is open. Close the compact disc auto
changer lid.
If the malfunction is not rectified, take
your vehicle to your Toyota dealer.
DISC ƝƜ
By using this button, you can select a
disc you wish to listen to.

Dolby

B NR∗

: Dolby noise reduction manufactured under license from
Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. DOLBY" and the
double D symbol
are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories
Licensing Corporation.

Push either side of the button until the
number of the disc you want to listen to
appears on the display.

148

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

LOAD
This button is used to load the compact
discs in the compact disc auto changer
which is integrated with the radio and cassette player. This compact disc auto
changer can store up to 6 discs.
The key must be in the ACC" or ON"
position.
Loading one compact disc only
To load one compact disc only, quickly
push and release the button. If you hold
the button too long (if the audio system
is on at this time, you hear a beep.), the
mechanism will change to the mode for
loading multiple compact discs. After
pushing the button, insert a compact disc.
At this time, the indicators on both sides
of the slot are flashing. After the disc is
loaded, the shutter of the slot will close
and the indicators will stop flashing.
If no compact disc is inserted, the shutter
will close after 15 seconds.

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

Loading multiple compact discs
To load multiple compact discs, push and
hold (until you hear a beep when the audio system is on). After pushing the button, insert the first compact disc. At this
time, the indicators on both sides of the
slot are flashing. After the disc is loaded,
the shutter of the slot will close and the
indicators will stop flashing. After a few
seconds, the shutter will automatically
open again so the next disc can be inserted. The same process can be applied
for loading the rest of the discs.
If no compact disc is inserted, the shutter
will close after 15 seconds.
PWR·VOL (Power and Volume)
Push PWR·VOL" to turn the audio system
on and off. Turn PWR·VOL" to adjust the
volume.

To randomly play the tracks on a disc:
Quickly push and release
".
"
will appear on the display. The disc you
are listening to will play in random order.
If you hear a beep, you held the button
too long, and the player will play all the
tracks in the magazine in random order.
To turn off the random feature, push this
button again.

RPT (Repeat)

To randomly play all the tracks in the
magazine:
Push and hold
" until you hear a
beep.
" will appear on the display and the player will perform all the
tracks on all the discs in the magazine in
random order. To turn off the random feature, push this button again.

There must be at least 3 seconds of blank
space between tracks in order for the repeat feature to work correctly.

RAND (Random)
There are two random featuresyou can
either listen to the tracks on all the compact discs in the magazine in random order, or only listen to the tracks on a
specific compact disc in random order.

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

Cassette Player
Push
" while the track is playing.
" will appear on the display. When

the track ends, it will automatically be
rewound and replayed. This process will
be continued until you push the button
again to turn off the repeat feature.

Compact Disc Player
There are two repeat featuresYou can
either replay a disc track or a whole compact disc.
Repeating a track:
Quickly push and release
" while the
track is playing.
" will appear on the
display. If you hear a beep, you held the
button too long, and the player will repeat
the whole disc. When the track ends, it
will automatically be replayed. This process will be continued until you push the
button again to turn off the repeat feature.

149

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

Repeating a disc:
Push and hold
" until you hear a
" will appear on the display.
beep.
The player will repeat all the tracks on the
disc you are listening to. When the disc
ends, the player will automatically go back
to the top track of the disc and replay.
This process will be continued until you
push the button again to turn off the repeat feature.
SCAN
Radio
You can either scan all the frequencies on
a band or scan only the preset stations
for that band.
To scan the preset stations:
Push and hold SCAN" until you hear a
beep. The radio will tune in the next preset station up the band, stay there for 5
seconds, and then move to the next preset station. To select a station, push
SCAN" again.

150

To scan all the frequencies:
Quickly push and release SCAN". If you
hear a beep, you held the button too long,
and the radio will scan the preset stations. The radio will find the next station
up the station band, stay there for 5 seconds, and then scan again. To select a
station, push SCAN" again.
Compact disc player
There are two scan featuresyou can either scan the tracks on a specific disc or
scan the first tracks of all the discs in the
magazine.
Scanning the tracks on a disc:
Quickly push and release SCAN". SCAN"
will appear on the display and the player
will scan all the tracks on the disc you
are listening to. If you hear a beep, you
held the button too long, and the player
will scan the first track of all the discs in
the magazine. To select a track, push
SCAN" again. If the player scanned all
the tracks on the disc, it will stop scanning.

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

Scanning the first track of all the discs in
the magazine:
Push SCAN" until you hear a beep.

·SCAN" will appear on the display
and the player will perform the first track
of the next disc. To select a disc, push
the SCAN" again. If the player has
scanned all the discs, it will stop scanning.
SEEK (Seeking)
Radio
In the seek mode, the radio finds and
plays the next station up or down the
station band.
To seek a station, quickly push and release the Ɯ" or Ɲ" under the SEEK".
Do this again to find another station.
Cassette Player
By using this button, you can skip up or
down to a different track.
You can skip up to nine tracks at a time.
Push the up or down side of the button.
FF 1" or REW 1" will appear on the
display.

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

Next, push either side of
until the number on the
the number of tracks you
you push the button ten
feature will be turned off.

the track button
display reaches
want to skip. If
times, the skip

When counting the number of tracks you
want to rewind, remember to count the
current track as well. For example, if you
want to rewind to a song that is two before the song you are listening to, push
on the down side of the button until REW
3" appears on the display.
If you have pushed the track button more
than you wanted to, push the other side
of the button. The track number will be
reduced.
The track number you select is not valid
if it is higher than the number of tracks
remaining on the current cassette side.

After the beginning of the tape is
reached, the player will automatically
start playing the same side.

There must be at least 3 seconds of blank
space between tracks for the track button
to work correctly. In addition, the feature
may not work well with some spoken
word, live, or classical recordings.
ST (Stereo reception) display
Your radio automatically changes to stereo
reception when a stereo broadcast is received. ST" appears on the display. If the
signal becomes weak, the radio reduces
the amount of channel separation to prevent the weak signal from creating noise.
If the signal becomes extremely weak, the
radio switches from stereo to mono reception.
TAPE

Push TAPE" to switch from radio or compact disc operation to cassette operation.
If the audio system is off, you can turn
on the cassette player by pushing TAPE".
In both cases, a cassette must already be
loaded in the player.

After the end of the tape is reached,
the player will automatically reverse
sides and start playing the other side.

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

151

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

Car audio system operating
hints
NOTICE
To ensure the correct audio system
operation:
z Be careful not to spill beverages
over the audio system.
z Do not put anything other than a
cassette tape or Compact Disc into
the slot.
z The use of cellular phone inside or
near the vehicle may cause a noise
from the speakers of the audio system which you are listening to.
However, this does not indicate a
malfunction.
RADIO RECEPTION
Usually, a problem with radio reception
does not mean there is a problem with
your radioit is just the normal result of
conditions outside the vehicle.
For example, nearby buildings and terrain
can interfere with FM reception. Power
lines or telephone wires can interfere with
AM signals. And of course, radio signals
have a limited range. The farther you are
from a station, the weaker its signal will
be. In addition, reception conditions
change constantly as your vehicle moves.

152

Here are some common reception problems that probably do not indicate a problem with your radio:
FM
Fading and drifting stationsGenerally, the
effective range of FM is about 40 km (25
miles). Once outside this range, you may
notice fading and drifting, which increase
with the distance from the radio transmitter. They are often accompanied by distortion.
Multi−pathFM signals are reflective,
making it possible for two signals to reach
your antenna at the same time. If this
happens, the signals will cancel each other out, causing a momentary flutter or
loss of reception.

AM
FadingAM broadcasts are reflected by
the upper atmosphereespecially at night.
These reflected signals can interfere with
those received directly from the radio station, causing the radio station to sound
alternately strong and weak.
Station interferenceWhen a reflected signal and a signal received directly from a
radio station are very nearly the same
frequency, they can interfere with each
other, making it difficult to hear the broadcast.
StaticAM is easily affected by external
sources of electrical noise, such as high
tension power lines, lightening, or electrical motors. This results in static.

Static and flutteringThese occur when
signals are blocked by buildings, trees, or
other large objects. Increasing the bass
level may reduce static and fluttering.

CARING FOR YOUR CASSETTE PLAYER
AND TAPES

Station swappingIf the FM signal you
are listening to is interrupted or weakened, and there is another strong station
nearby on the FM band, your radio may
tune in the second station until the original signal can be picked up again.

Clean the tape head and other parts regularly.

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

For the best performance for your cassette player and tapes:

A dirty tape head or tape path can
decrease sound quality and tangle your
cassette tapes. The easiest way to
clean them is by using a cleaning tape.
(A wet type is recommended.)

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

If moisture gets into your compact disc

Use high−quality cassettes.

Low−quality cassette tapes can cause

player, you may not hear any sound
even though your compact disc player
appears to be working. Remove the
disc from the player and wait until it
dries.

many problems, including poor sound,
inconsistent
playing
speed,
and
constant auto−reversing. They can also
get stuck or tangled in the cassette
player.

Do not use a cassette if it has been
damaged or tangled or if its label is
peeling off.

Do not leave a cassette in the player
if you are not listening to it, especially
if it is hot outside.

Store cassettes in their cases and out
of direct sunlight.

Avoid using cassettes with a total playing time longer than 100 minutes (50
minutes per side). The tape used in
these cassettes is thin and could get
stuck or tangled in the cassette player.

CARING FOR YOUR
PLAYER AND DISCS

COMPACT

DISC

Use only compact discs labeled as
shown.
CD−R
(CD−Recordable),
CD−RW (CD−Re−writable) and personal
computer use CD−ROMs may not be
playable on your compact disc player.

Your compact disc player is intended
for use with 12 cm (4.7 in.) discs only.

Extremely high temperatures can keep
your compact disc player from working.
On hot days, use the air conditioning
to cool the vehicle interior before you
listen to a disc.

Bumpy roads or other vibrations may
make your compact disc player skip.
2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

153

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

Your compact disc player cannot play
special shaped or low−quality compact
discs such as those shown here. Do
not use them as the player could be
damaged.

Handle compact discs carefully, especially when you are inserting them.
Hold them on the edge and do not
bend them. Avoid getting fingerprints
on them, particularly on the shiny side.

Dirt, scrapes, warping, pin holes, or
other disc damage could cause the
player to skip or to repeat a section of
a track. (To see a pin hole, hold the
disc up to the light.)

Remove discs from the compact disc
player when you are not listening to
them. Store them in their plastic cases
away from moisture, heat, and direct
sunlight.
To clean a compact disc: Wipe it with a
soft, lint−free cloth that has been dampened with water. Wipe in a straight line
from the center to the edge of the disc
(not in circles). Dry it with another soft,
lint−free cloth. Do not use a conventional
record cleaner or anti−static device.

154

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

CAUTION
Compact disc players use an invisible
laser beam which could cause hazardous radiation exposure if directed
outside the unit. Be sure to operate
the player correctly.

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

SECTION

1− 8

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND
CONTROLS
Air conditioning system
Manual air conditioning system
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Air flow selector settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operating tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic air conditioning system
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Air flow selector settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operating tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Instrument panel vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear heater system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

156
159
159
162
166
166
169
171

155

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

Manual air conditioning system
Controls
1. A/C" Button (on some models)
2. Air Intake Selector
3. Air Flow Selector
4. Temperature Selector
5. Fan Speed Selector

156

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

4. Floor/WindshieldAir
flows
mainly
from the floor vents and windshield
vents.

Fan speed selector
Move the knob to adjust the fan speedto
the right to increase, to the left to decrease.

Turning the air flow selector to the
floor/windshield position turns on the
defogging function with the purpose of
clearing the front view.

Temperature selector
Move the knob to adjust the temperatureto the right to warm, to the left to
cool.

This position allows the air intake to
select FRESH automatically. This is to
clean up the front view more quickly.
If you want to return the setting to
RECIRCULATE mode, press the air intake selector button once again.
Air flow selector

Vehicle with A/C" button

Move the knob to select the vents used
for air flow.
the

Press the A/C" button for dehumidified
heating or cooling. This setting clears
the front view more quickly.

2. Bi−levelAir flows from both the floor
vents and the instrument panel vents.

It is recommended to close the lower
vent. For details about it, see Instrument panel vents" in this section.

3. FloorAir flows mainly from the floor
vents.

5. WindshieldAir flows mainly from the
windshield vents.

It is recommended to close the lower
vent. For details about it, see Instrument panel vents" in this section.

Turning the air flow selector to the
windshield position turns on the defogging function with the purpose of clearing the front view.

1. PanelAir flows mainly
instrument panel vents.

from

This position allows the air intake to
select FRESH automatically. This is to
clean up the front view more quickly.
2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

157

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

A/C" button

If you want to return the setting to
RECIRCULATE mode, press the air intake selector button once again.

To turn on the air conditioning, press the
A/C" button. The A/C" button indicator
will come on. To turn the air conditioning
off, press the button again.

Vehicle with A/C" button
Press the A/C" button for dehumidified
heating or cooling. This setting clears
the front view more quickly.

If the A/C" button indicator flashes, there
is a problem in the air conditioning system
and the air conditioning automatically
shuts off. If this happens, take your vehicle to a Toyota dealer for service.

It is recommended to close the lower
vent. For details about it, see Instrument panel vents" in this section.
For details about air flow selector settings,
see the illustration after A/C" button.
Air intake selector
Press the button to select the air source.
1. RecirculateRecirculates the air inside
the vehicle.
2. FreshDraws outside air into the system.
To prevent fogging up of the windshield,
the air intake mode may change automatically to FRESH depending on the condition of the air conditioning system.

158

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

Air flow selector settings

Operating tips
To cool off your Toyota after it has
been parked in the hot sun, drive with
the windows open for a few minutes.
This vents the hot air, allowing the air
conditioning to cool the interior more
quickly.

Make sure the air intake grilles in front
of the windshield are not blocked (by
leaves or snow, for example).

On humid days, do not blow cold air
on the windshield. The windshield could
fog up because of the difference in air
temperature on the inside and outside
of the windshield.

Keep the area under the front seats
clear to allow air to circulate throughout the vehicle.

On cold days, turn the fan speed selector to HI" for a minute to help clear
the intake ducts of snow or moisture.
This can reduce the amount of fogging
on the windows.

When driving on dusty roads, close all
windows. If dust thrown up by the vehicle is still drawn into the vehicle after
closing the windows, it is recommended
that the air intake selector be set to
FRESH and the fan speed selector to
any setting except OFF".

: See Instrument panel vents" in this section.
2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

159

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

If following another vehicle on a dusty
road, or driving in windy and dusty
conditions, it is recommended that the
air intake selector be temporarily set to
RECIRCULATE, which will close off the
outside passage and prevent outside
air and dust from entering the vehicle
interior.

Heating

Air conditioning

For best results, set controls to:

Fan speedAny setting except OFF"
TemperatureTowards WARM
(red zone)
Air intakeFRESH (outside air)
Air flowFLOOR
Lower ventCLOSED
Air conditioningOFF

For quick heating, select recirculated
air for a few minutes. To keep the
windows from fogging, select fresh after the vehicle interior has been
warmed.

Press the A/C" button on for dehumidified heating.

Choose floor/windshield air flow to heat
the vehicle interior while defrosting or
defogging the windshield.

160

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

Fan speedAny setting except OFF"
TemperatureTowards COLD
(blue zone)
Air intakeFRESH (outside air)
Air flowPANEL
Air conditioningON

For quick cooling, move the air intake
selector to recirculate for a few minutes.
Ventilation
For best results, set controls to:
Fan speedAny setting except OFF"
TemperatureTowards COLD
(blue zone)
Air intakeFRESH (outside air)
Air flowPANEL
Air conditioningOFF

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

Defogging
The inside of the windshield
For best results, set controls to:
Fan speedAny setting except OFF"
TemperatureTowards WARM
(red zone) to heat;
COLD (blue zone)
to cool
Air intakeFRESH (outside air)
Air flowWINDSHIELD
Lower ventCLOSED
Turning the air flow selector to the windshield or floor/windshield position turns on
the defogging function with the purpose of
clearing the front view.
When turning the air flow selector to windshield or floor/windshield position, the air
intake selects FRESH automatically. This
is to clean up the front view more quickly.
If you want to return the setting to RECIRCULATE mode, press the air intake
selector button once again.
Vehicles with A/C" button
Press the A/C" button for dehumidified
heating or cooling. This setting clears the
front view more quickly.

On humid days, do not blow cold air
on the windshieldthe difference between the outside and inside temperatures could make the fogging worse.
Defrosting
The outside of the windshield
For best results, set controls to:

Vehicles with A/C" button
Press the A/C" button for dehumidified
heating. This setting clears the front view
more quickly.

To heat the vehicle interior while defrosting the windshield, choose floor/
windshield air flow.

Fan speedAny setting except OFF"
TemperatureTowards WARM
(red zone)
Air intakeFRESH (outside air)
Air flowWINDSHIELD
Lower ventCLOSED
Turning the air flow selector to the windshield or floor/windshield position turns on
the defrosting function with the purpose of
clearing the front view.
When turning the air flow selector to windshield or floor/windshield position, the air
intake selects FRESH automatically. This
is to clean up the front view more quickly.
If you want to return the setting to RECIRCULATE mode, press the air intake
selector button once again.

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

161

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

Automatic air conditioning system
Controls
1. Air Intake Selector
2. Windshield Air Flow Button
3. A/C" Button
4. Fan Speed Selector
5. OFF" Button
6. MODE" Button (air flow selector)
7. Temperature Selector
8. AUTO" Button

162

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

AUTO" button

Temperature selector

For automatic operation of the air conditioning, press the AUTO" button. An indicator light will illuminate to show that the
automatic operation mode has been selected.

Turn the knob to adjust the temperatureto the right to warm, to the left to
cool.

In the automatic operation mode, the air
conditioning selects the most suitable fan
speed, air flow, air intake and on−off of
the air conditioning according to the temperature.

OFF" button
Push the button to turn off the air conditioning system.

When you adjust the temperature selector
button to maximum cooling, a MAX
COLD" message will appear on the display
and the air intake mode will be automatically changed to RECIRCULATE.

Air flow selector, MODE" button
Press the button to select the vents used
for air flow.

You may use manual controls if you want
to select your own settings.

In automatic operation, you do not have
to select the air flow unless you desire
another air flow mode.

To turn off the automatic operation, press
the OFF" button.

1. PanelAir flows mainly
instrument panel vents.

Fan speed selector
Turn the knob to adjust the fan speed.

from

the

2. Bi−levelAir flows from both the floor
vents and the instrument panel vents.

In automatic operation, you do not have
to adjust the fan speed unless you desire
another fan speed mode.

3. FloorAir flows mainly from the floor
vents.
It is recommended to close the lower
vent. For details about it, see Instrument panel vents" in this section.
2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

163

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

To turn off the air conditioning alone,
press the A/C" button once again.

4. Floor/WindshieldAir
flows
mainly
from the floor vents and windshield
vents.

When the A/C" button is not pressed in,
pressing another air flow button turns off
the air conditioning.

It is recommended to close the lower
vent. For details about it, see Instrument panel vents" in this section.

For details about air flow selector settings,
see the illustration after A/C" button.

For further information for removing frost
and fog, see Instrument panel vents" in
this section.

Windshield air flow button
When this button is pressed, air flows
mainly from the windshield vents and the
FRESH mode is automatically set. This
setting clears the front view more quickly.
If you want to return the setting to RECIRCULATE mode, press the air intake
selector button once again.
Pressing the button once again returns the
air flow mode to the last one used.
Pressing the windshield air flow button
turns on the defroster−linked air conditioning. At this time, the A/C" button indicator
comes on regardless of whether or not the
A/C" button is pressed in. This is to
clean up the front view more quickly.

164

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

A/C" button
To turn on the air conditioning, press the
A/C" button. The A/C" button indicator
will come on. To turn the air conditioning
off, press the button again.
If the A/C" button indicator flashes, there
is a problem in the air conditioning system
and the air conditioning automatically
shuts off. If this happens, take your vehicle to a Toyota dealer for service.

Air intake selector
Press the button to select the air source.
1. RecirculateRecirculates the air inside
the vehicle.
2. FreshDraws outside air into the system.
If the engine coolant temperature becomes
extremely high, RECIRCULATE mode will
automatically be selected. This is not a
malfunction. When the engine coolant temperature is lowered, the previous mode
will resume.
To prevent fogging up of the windshield,
the air intake mode may change automatically to FRESH depending on the condition of the air conditioning system.
2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

165

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

Air flow selector settings

Make sure the air intake grilles in front
of the windshield are not blocked (by
leaves or snow, for example).

On humid days, do not blow cold air
on the windshield. The windshield could
fog up because of the difference in air
temperature on the inside and outside
of the windshield.

Keep the area under the front seats
clear to allow air to circulate throughout the vehicle.

On cold days, push the fan speed selector to adjust the fan speed high for
a minute to help clear the intake ducts
of snow or moisture. This can reduce
the amount of fogging on the windows.

: See Instrument panel vents" in this section.

166

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

Heating

Air conditioning

For best results, set controls to:

For automatic operation

Press in the AUTO" button.
TemperatureTo the desired
temperature
Air conditioningOFF
For manual operation
Fan speedTo the desired fan speed
TemperatureTowards WARM
(to the right)
Air intakeFRESH (outside air)
Air flowFLOOR
Lower ventCLOSED
Air conditioningOFF

For quick heating, select recirculated

Press in the AUTO" button.
TemperatureTo the desired
temperature
Air conditioningON
For manual operation
Fan speedTo the desired fan speed
TemperatureTowards COLD
(to the left)
Air intakeFRESH (outside air)
Air flowPANEL
Air conditioningON

For quick cooling, select recirculated
air for a few minutes.

air for a few minutes. To keep the
windows from fogging, select fresh after the vehicle interior has been
warmed.

Press the A/C" button on for dehumidified heating.

Choose floor/windshield air flow to heat
the vehicle interior while defrosting or
defogging the windshield.

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

167

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

Ventilation

Defogging and defrosting

For best results, set controls to:

The inside of the windshield

For automatic operation

For best results, set controls to:

Press in the AUTO" button.
TemperatureTowards COLD
(to the left)
Air conditioningOFF
For manual operation
Fan speedTo the desired fan speed
TemperatureTowards COLD
(to the left)
Air intakeFRESH (outside air)
Air flowPANEL
Air conditioningOFF

For automatic operation
TemperatureTowards WARM
(to the right) to heat;
COLD (to the left)
to cool
Air intakeFRESH (outside air)
Air flowWINDSHIELD
Lower ventCLOSED
For manual operation
Fan speedTo the desired fan speed
TemperatureTowards WARM
(to the right) to heat;
COLD (to the left)
to cool
Air intakeFRESH (outside air)
Air flowWINDSHIELD
Lower ventCLOSED
When pressing the windshield air flow button, the air intake selects FRESH automatically. This is to clean up the front
view more quickly.
If you want to return the setting to RECIRCULATE mode, press the air intake
selector button once again.

168

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

Pressing the windshield air flow button
turns on the defroster−linked air conditioning. At this time, the A/C" button indicator
comes on regardless of whether or not the
A/C" button is pressed in. This is to
clean up the front view more quickly.
To turn off the air conditioning alone,
press the A/C" button once again.
When the A/C" button is not pressed in,
pressing another air flow button turns off
the air conditioning.

On humid days, do not blow cold air
on the windshieldthe difference between the outside and inside temperatures could make the fogging worse.

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

Instrument panel vents
The outside of the windshield
For best results, set controls to:
For automatic operation
TemperatureTowards WARM
(to the right)
Air intakeFRESH (outside air)
Air flowWINDSHIELD
Lower ventCLOSED

To turn off the air conditioning alone,
press the A/C" button once again.
When the A/C" button is not pressed in,
pressing another air flow button turns off
the air conditioning.

To heat the vehicle interior while defrosting
the
windshield,
floor/windshield air flow.

choose

For manual operation
Fan speedTo the desired fan speed
TemperatureTowards WARM
(to the right)
Air intakeFRESH (outside air)
Air flowWINDSHIELD
Lower ventCLOSED

Side vents

When pressing the windshield air flow button, the air intake selects FRESH automatically. This is to clean up the front
view more quickly.
If you want to return the setting to RECIRCULATE mode, press the air intake
selector button once again.
Pressing the windshield button turns on
the defroster−linked air conditioning. At
this time, the A/C" button indicator comes
on regardless of whether or not the A/C"
button is pressed in. This is to clean up
the front view more quickly.

Lower vent
2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

169

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

If air flow control is not satisfactory, check
the instrument panel vents. The instrument
panel vents may be opened or closed as
shown.
For removing frost or fog, it is recommended to close the lower vent when you
push the windshield air flow button or using the Floor", Floor/windshield" or
Windshield" mode.

170

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

Rear heater system
1. Fan Speed Selector
2. Temperature Selector
Fan speed selector
Push the switch toward HI" or LO".
Temperature selector
Place the lever
OFF" position.

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

anywhere

except

the

171

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

172

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

SECTION

1− 9

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND
CONTROLS
Other equipment
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Thermometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cigarette lighter and ashtrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Garage door opener . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Garage door opener box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Auxiliary box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Warning reflector holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear console box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Card holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tie−down hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Luggage cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Floor mat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

174
174
175
176
176
177
180
182
183
184
185
185
186
187
187
188

173

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

Clock

Thermometer
If the electrical power source has been
disconnected from the clock, the time display will automatically be set to 1:00 (one
o’clock).
When the instrument panel lights are
turned on, the brightness of the time indication will be reduced.

The digital clock indicates the time.

The thermometer indicates the outside
air temperature when you push the
OUT/T" button.

The key must be in the ACC" or ON"
position.

The key must be in the ON" position.

To reset the hour: Push the H" button.
To reset the minutes: Push the M" button.
If quick adjustment to a full hour is desired, push the :00" button.

Pushing the button once again or turning
the temperature selector will turn off the
display.

For example, if the :00" button is depressed when the time is between
1:011:29, the time will change to 1:00.
If the time is between 1:301:59, the
time will change to 2:00.

When the air conditioning system is on,
pushing the button once indicates the outside temperature and a second time
changes the display back to the air conditioning temperature.
Also, turning the temperature selector
while the outside temperature is indicated
changes the display to the air conditioning
temperature.

174

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

Cigarette lighter and ashtrays
The vehicles sold in U.S.A., the temperature is indicated in degrees Fahrenheit,
while the vehicles sold in Canada, the
temperature is indicated in degrees Centigrade.

CIGARETTE LIGHTER
To use the cigarette lighter, press it in.
When it becomes heated, it automatically pops out ready for use.
If the engine is not running, the key must
be in the ACC" position.
Do not hold the cigarette lighter pressed
in.
Use a Toyota genuine cigarette lighter or
equivalent for replacement.
ASHTRAY
Cigarette lighter and front ashtray

To use the ashtray, pull it out.
When finished with your cigarette, thoroughly extinguish it in the ashtray to prevent other cigarette butts from catching
fire. After using the ashtray, push it back
in completely.
To remove the ashtray, press down on the
lock spring plate and pull out.

CAUTION
To reduce the chance of injury in
case of an accident or sudden stop
while driving, always push the ashtray back in completely after using.
Rear ashtray
2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

175

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

Power outlets

Glove box
The power outlets are designed
power supply for car accessories.

for

The key must be in the ACC" or ON"
position for the power outlet to be used.

NOTICE
z To prevent the fuse from being
blown, do not use the electricity
over the total vehicle capacity of
12V/120W.

Instrument panel

z To prevent the battery from being
discharged, do not use the power
outlets longer than necessary when
the engine is not running.
z Close the power outlet lids when
the power outlets are not in use.
Inserting a foreign object other than
the appropriate plug that fits the
outlet, or allowing any liquid into
the outlet may cause electrical failure or short circuits.

To use the glove box, do this.
To open: Pull the lever.
On some models, the glove box light will
come on when the glove box is open with
the instrument panel lights on.
To lock: Insert the master key and turn it
clockwise.

CAUTION
To reduce the chance of injury in
case of an accident or a sudden stop,
always keep the glove box door
closed while driving.
Luggage compartment

176

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

Garage door opener
(a) Programming the HomeLink
The HomeLink in your vehicle has 3
buttons and you can store one program
for each button.

To ensure correct programming into the
HomeLink, install a new battery in the
hand−held transmitter prior to programming.

The battery side of the hand−held transmitter must be pointed away from the
HomeLink during the programming process.
The garage door opener (HomeLink
Universal Transceiver) is manufactured
under license from HomeLink and can
be programmed to operate garage
doors, gates, entry doors, door locks,
home lighting systems, and security
systems, etc.

For Canadian users, follow the procedure
in Programming an entrance gate/Programming all devices in the Canadian
market".
1. Decide which of 3 HomeLink buttons
you want to program.
2. Place your hand−held garage transmitter 25 to 75 mm (1 to 3 in.) away from
the surface of the HomeLink.
Keep the indicator light on the HomeLink
in view while programming.

3. Simultaneously press and hold the
hand−held garage transmitter button
along with the selected HomeLink button.
4. When the indicator light on the
HomeLink changes from a slow to a
rapid flash after 20 seconds, you can
release both buttons.
5. Test the operation of the HomeLink by
pressing the newly programmed button.
If programming a garage door opener,
check to see if the garage door opens
and closes.
If the garage door does not operate, identify if your garage transmitter is of the
Rolling Code" type. Press and hold the
programmed HomeLink button. The garage door has the rolling code feature if
the indicator light (on the HomeLink)
flashes rapidly and then remains lit after
2 seconds. If your garage transmitter is
the Rolling Code" type, proceed to the
heading Programming a rolling code system".
6. Repeat steps 2 through 5 for each remaining HomeLink button to program
another device.

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

177

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

Programming a rolling code system
If your device is Rolling Code"
equipped, it is necessary to follow
steps 1 through 4 under the heading
Programming the HomeLink" before
proceeding with the steps listed below.
1. Locate the training" button on the ceiling mounted garage door opener motor.
The exact location and color of the
button may vary by brand of garage
door opener. Refer to the owner’s
guide supplied by the garage door
opener manufacturer for the location of
this training" button.
2. Press the training" button on the ceiling mounted garage door opener motor.
Following this step, you have 30 seconds
in which to initiate step 3 below.
3. Press and release the vehicle’s programmed HomeLink button twice. The
garage door may open. If the door
does open, the programming process is
complete. If the door does not open,
press and release the button a third
time. This third press and release will
complete the programming process by
opening the garage door.

178

The ceiling mounted garage door opener
motor
should
now
recognize
the
HomeLink unit and be able activate the
garage door up/down.

6. Test the operation of the HomeLink by
pressing the newly programmed button.
Check to see if the gate/device operates correctly.

4. Repeat steps 1 through 3 for each remaining HomeLink button to program
another rolling code system.

7. Repeat steps 1 through 6 for each remaining HomeLink button to program
another device.

Programming an entrance gate/Programming all devices in the Canadian market

Programming other devices

1. Decide which of the 3 HomeLink buttons you want to program.
2. Place
your
hand−held gate/device
transmitter 25 to 75 mm (1 to 3 in.)
away
from
the
surface
of
the
HomeLink.
Keep the indicator light on the HomeLink
in view while programming.
3. Press
and
hold
HomeLink button.

the

selected

4. Continuously press and release (cycle)
the hand−held gate/device transmitter
button every two seconds until step 5
is complete.
5. When the indicator light on the
HomeLink changes from a slow to a
rapid flash after 20 seconds, you can
release both buttons.

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

To program other devices such as home
security systems, home door locks or
lighting, contact your authorized Toyota
dealer for assistance.
Reprogramming a button
buttons cannot be
Individual HomeLink
erased, however, to reprogram a single
button, follow the procedure Programming
the HomeLink".
(b) Operating the HomeLink
To operate the HomeLink, press the
appropriate HomeLink button to activate
the programmed device. The HomeLink
indicator light should come on. The
HomeLink continues to send the signal
for up to 20 seconds as long as the
button is pressed.

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

(c) Erasing
the
entire
HomeLink
memory (all three programs)
To erase all previously programmed codes
at one time, press and hold down the 2
outside buttons for 20 seconds until the
indicator light flashes.
If you sell your vehicle, be sure to erase
the programs stored in the HomeLink
memory.

CAUTION

When programming the HomeLink
Universal Transceiver, you may be
operating a garage door or other
device. Make sure people and objects are out of the way of the garage door or other device to prevent potential harm or damage.

Do not use this HomeLink Universal Transceiver with any garage
door opener that lacks the safety
stop and reverse feature as required by federal safety standards.
(This includes any garage door
opener model manufactured before
April 1, 1982.) A garage door opener, which cannot detect an object,
signaling the door to stop and reverse, does not meet current federal safety standards. Using a garage
door opener without these features
increases risk of serious injury or
death.

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and with RSS−210 of the
Industry Canada. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions: (1) This
device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept
any interference that may be received,
including interference that may cause
undersired operation.
WARNING: This transmitter has been
tested and complies with FCC and
Industry Canada rules. Changes or
modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the device.

179

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

Garage door opener box

The box is designed to store a garage
door opener transmitter.
Open the cover and remove the Velcro
loop.

180

Remove the paper strip covering the adhesive on back side of loop and adhere loop
to back side of the transmitter near center.

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

Please note if transmitter has wire clip for
sun visor, this clip must be removed prior
to adhesion of the Velcro.

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

Place the transmitter with Velcro loop facing inside of box into the box. Make sure
the transmitter button is located above
button pins.

Remove spacers from the box. Place the
largest spacer on the pin that would be
below transmitter button when the cover is
closed. Close the cover.

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

When the garage door opener transmitter
is properly installed, you can operate the
transmitter by pushing the cover.

181

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

Auxiliary box (type A)
Put the remained spacers back
place.

in its

CAUTION
To reduce the chance of injury in
case of an accident or a sudden stop,
always keep the garage door opener
box closed while driving.

If the spacer does not contact with your
garage door opener transmitter:

To use the box, open the lid.

Check to see if spacer is on correct

CAUTION

pin.

To reduce the chance of injury in

Attach another spacer to the top of

case of an accident or a sudden
stop, always keep the box closed
while driving.

original spacer. Check operation. If required, continue add spacers until contact is achieved.

Do not place any object heavier

If the transmitter is clattering during driving, fill in a piece of felt or pad to prevent
the transmitter from clattering.

182

than approximately 50 g (0.11 lb.) in
it. Heavier objects may cause the
box to open and contents to fly out
resulting in injuries.

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

Auxiliary box (type B)

Warning reflector holder

To open the box, turn the two knobs.

The auxiliary box is equipped with two
straps to hold the warning reflector.

NOTICE
In hot weather, inside of the vehicle
becomes very hot. Do not leave anything flammable or deformable such
as a lighter, the glasses, etc. inside.

Although the warning reflector itself is not
included as an original equipment, this
auxiliary box can be used to store the
warning reflector.
Hold the warning reflector kit with the
straps.
1. To release: Push in both sides of the
buckle as shown in the illustration.
2. To tighten: Connect the buckle, then
pull on the belt.

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

183

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

Rear console box
UPPER TRAY
To access the upper tray, raise the console box lid without touching the lock
release lever.

CONSOLE BOX
To access the rear console box, pull up
the lock release lever while raising the
rear console box lid.

184

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

Card holder

Front cup holders
There is a card holder on the inside of
the rear console box lid.
To use the card holder, raise the console
box lid without touching the lock release
lever.

The cup holders are designed for holding cups or drink−cans securely.

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

185

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

Rear cup holders
The cup holders are designed for holding cups or drink−cans securely.

CAUTION

USING REAR CUP HOLDERS

Do not place anything else other

To use the rear cup holders, pull out
the rear cup holder lid.

than cups or drink−cans on the cup
holder, as such items may be
thrown about in the compartment
and possibly injure people in the
vehicle during sudden braking or in
an accident.

You can select from 3 arm positions.

CAUTION

To reduce the chance of injury in

Do not place anything else other

case of an accident or a sudden
stop while driving, keep the cup
holder closed when it is not in use.

than cups or drink−cans on the cup
holder, as such items may be
thrown about in the compartment
and possibly injure people in the
vehicle during sudden braking or in
an accident.

To reduce the chance of injury in
case of an accident or a sudden
stop while driving, keep the cup
holder closed when it is not in use.

186

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

CLOSING REAR CUP HOLDER LID
To close the rear cup holder lid, replace the arms and pull up the lid.

NOTICE

Tie−down hooks

Luggage cover

To secure your luggage, use the tie−
down hooks as shown above.

To use the luggage cover, pull it out of
the retractor and hook it to the anchors.

See Luggage stowage precautions" in
Section 2 for precautions in loading luggage.

Be sure to replace the arms before
closing the rear cup holder lid.

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

187

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

Floor mat

To remove the luggage cover, retract
and lift it up.

NOTICE
As the plastic parts used on both
ends of the luggage cover may break
if exposed to a shock, take care not
to hit or knock them when attaching,
detaching or storing the cover.

188

Use a floor mat of the correct size.
If the floor carpet and floor mat have a
hole, then it is designed for use with a
locking clip. Fix the floor mat with locking
clip into the hole in the floor carpet.

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

CAUTION
Make sure the floor mat is properly
placed on the floor carpet. If the floor
mat slips and interferes with the
movement of the pedals during driving, it may cause an accident.

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

SECTION

INFORMATION BEFORE DRIVING YOUR
TOYOTA
Off−road vehicle precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Break−in period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operation in foreign countries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Three−way catalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine exhaust cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Facts about engine oil consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Twin ground electrode spark plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brake pad wear limit indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Luggage stowage precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Your Toyota’s identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Theft prevention labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Suspension and chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Types of tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

190
191
191
193
194
195
195
196
197
200
201
201
202
203
203

189

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

Off−road vehicle precautions
This vehicle belongs to the utility vehicle class, which has higher ground
clearance and narrower tread in relation
to the height of its center of gravity to
make it capable of performing in a wide
variety of off−road applications. Specific
design characteristics give it a higher
center of gravity than ordinary passenger cars. This vehicle design feature
causes this type of vehicle to be more
likely to rollover. And, utility vehicles
have a significantly higher rollover rate
than other types of vehicles. An advantage of the higher ground clearance is
a better view of the road allowing you
to anticipate problems. It is not designed for cornering at the same
speeds as ordinary passenger cars any
more than low−slung sports cars designed to perform satisfactorily under
off−road conditions. Therefore, sharp
turns at excessive speeds may cause
rollover.

CAUTION
Always observe the following precautions to minimize the risk of serious
personal injury or damage to your vehicle:

In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to
die than a person wearing a seat
belt. Therefore, the driver and all
passengers should fasten their seat
belts whenever the vehicle is moving.

Avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers, if at all possible. Failure to
operate this vehicle correctly may
result in loss of control or vehicle
rollover causing death or serious
injury.

Avoid loading any items on the roof
that will raise the vehicle’s center
of gravity.

Always slow down in gusty crosswinds. Because of its profile and
higher center of gravity, your vehicle is more sensitive to side
winds than an ordinary passenger
car. Slowing down will allow you to
have better control.

190

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

When driving off−road or in rugged
terrain, do not drive at excessive
speeds, jump, make sharp turns,
strike objects, etc. This may cause
loss of control or vehicle rollover
causing death or serious injury. You
are also risking expensive damage
to your vehicle’s suspension and
chassis.

Do not drive horizontally across
steep slopes. Driving straight up or
straight down is preferred. Your vehicle (or any similar off−road vehicle) can tip over sideways much
more easily than forward or backward.

Break−in period

Fuel

Drive gently and avoid high speeds.

FUEL TYPE

Your vehicle does not need an elaborate
break−in. But following a few simple tips
for the first 1600 km (1000 miles) can add
to the future economy and long life of
your vehicle:

Your new vehicle must use only unleaded gasoline.

Do not drive over 88 km/h (55 mph).
Run the engine at moderate speed between 2000 and 4000 rpm.

Avoid full−throttle starts.
Try to avoid hard stops during the first
300 km (200 miles).

Do not drive for a long time at any
single speed, either fast or slow.

Do not tow a trailer during the first
800km (500miles).

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

To help prevent gas station mix−ups, your
Toyota has a smaller fuel tank opening.
The special nozzle on pumps with unleaded fuel will fit it, but the larger standard nozzle on pumps with leaded gas will
not.
At a minimum, the gasoline you use
should meet the specifications of ASTM
D4814 in the U.S.A. and CGSB 3.5−M93
in Canada.

NOTICE
Do not use leaded gasoline. Use of
leaded gasoline will cause the three−
way catalytic converter to lose its effectiveness and the emission control
system to function improperly. Also,
this can increase maintenance costs.

191

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

OCTANE RATING

QUALITY GASOLINE

OXYGENATES IN GASOLINE

Select Octane Rating 87 (Research Octane Number 91) or higher.

Automotive manufacturers in the U.S.,
Europe and Japan have developed a
specification for quality fuel named
World−Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC) that
is expected to be applied world wide.
The WWFC consists of three categories
that depend on required emission levels. In the U.S., category 3 has been
adopted. The WWFC improves air quality by providing for better emissions in
vehicle fleets, and customer satisfaction
through better vehicle performance.

Toyota allows the use of oxygenate
blended gasoline where the oxygenate
content is up to 10% ethanol or 15%
MTBE. If you use gasohol in your
Toyota, be sure that it has an octane
rating no lower than 87.

Use of unleaded gasoline with an octane
rating or research octane number lower
than stated above will cause persistent
heavy knocking. If it is severe, this will
lead to engine damage.
If your engine knocks...
If you detect heavy knocking even when
using the recommended fuel, or if you
hear steady knocking while holding a
steady speed on level roads, consult your
Toyota dealer.
However, now and then, you may notice
light knocking for a short time while accelerating or driving up hills. This is no need
of concern.
GASOLINE
ADDITIVES

CONTAINING

DETERGENT

Toyota recommends the use of gasoline
that contains detergent additives to
avoid build−up of engine deposits.

CLEANER BURNING GASOLINE
Cleaner burning gasoline, including reformulated gasoline that contains oxygenates such as ethanol or MTBE is
available in many areas.
Toyota recommends the use of cleaner
burning gasoline and appropriately blended
reformulated gasoline. These types of gasoline provide excellent vehicle performance, reduce vehicle emissions, and improve air quality.

However, all gasoline sold in the U.S.
contains detergent additives to keep clean
and/or clean intake systems.

192

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

Toyota does not recommend the use of
gasoline containing methanol.
SULFUR IN GASOLINE
If your vehicle is certified to California
Emission Regulations, the vehicle is designed to operate on California cleaner
burning gasoline (CBG) that contains
lower sulfur. If you cannot use California CBG, your emission control system
may suffer damage and turn on the
Malfunction Indicator Lamp.
If the malfunction is caused by the type
of fuel used, repairs may not be covered
by your warranty.
GASOLINE CONTAINING MMT
Some gasoline contain an octane enhancing additive called MMT (Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl).

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

Operation in foreign countries
Toyota does not recommend the use of
gasoline that contains MMT. If fuel containing MMT is used, your emission control system may be adversely affected.
The Malfunction Indicator Lamp on the instrument cluster may come on. If this happens, contact your Toyota dealer for service.

FUEL TANK CAPACITY
70 L (18.5 gal., 15.4 Imp. gal.)

If you plan to drive your Toyota in
another country...
First, comply with the vehicle registration
laws.
Second, confirm the availability of the correct fuel (unleaded and minimum octane
number).

GASOLINE QUALITY
In a very few cases, you may experience
driveability problems caused by the particular gasoline that you are using. If you
continue to have unacceptable driveability,
try changing gasoline brands. If this does
not rectify your problem, then consult your
Toyota dealer.

NOTICE
z Do not use gasohol other than
stated above. It will cause fuel system damage or vehicle performance
problems.
z If driveability problems occur (poor
hot starting, vaporizing, engine
knock, etc.), discontinue the use.
z Take care not to spill gasohol during refueling. Gasohol may cause
paint damage.

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

193

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

Three−way catalytic converter
NOTICE
A large amount of unburned gases
flowing into the three−way catalytic
converter may cause it to overheat
and create a fire hazard. To prevent
this and other damage, observe the
following precautions:
z Use only unleaded gasoline.

The three−way catalytic converter is an
emission control device installed in the
exhaust system.
The purpose is to reduce pollutants in the
exhaust gas.

z Do not drive with an extremely low
fuel level; running out of fuel could
cause the engine to misfire, creating an excessive load on the three−
way catalytic converter.
z Do not allow the engine to run at
idle speed for more than 20 minutes.
z Avoid racing the engine.

CAUTION

z Do not push−start or pull−start your
vehicle.

Keep people and combustible mate-

z Do not turn off the ignition while
the vehicle is moving.

rials away from the exhaust pipe
while the engine is running. The
exhaust gas is very hot.

Do not drive, idle or park your vehicle over anything that might burn
easily such as grass, leaves, paper
or rags.

194

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

z Keep your engine in good running
order. Malfunctions in the engine
electrical system, electronic ignition
system/distributor ignition system
or fuel systems could cause an extremely high three−way catalytic
converter temperature.
z If the engine becomes difficult to
start or stalls frequently, take your
vehicle in for a check−up as soon
as possible. Remember, your Toyota
dealer knows your vehicle and its
three−way catalytic converter system best.
z To ensure that the three−way catalytic converter and the entire emission control system operate properly, your vehicle must receive the
periodic inspections required by the
Toyota Maintenance Schedule. For
scheduled maintenance information,
refer to the Scheduled Maintenance
Guide" or Owner’s Manual Supplement".

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

Facts about engine oil
consumption

Engine exhaust cautions
CAUTION

Avoid inhaling the engine exhaust.
It contains carbon monoxide, which
is a colorless and odorless gas. It
can cause unconsciousness or even
death.

Make sure the exhaust system has
no holes or loose connections. The
system should be checked from
time to time. If you hit something,
or notice a change in the sound of
the exhaust, have the system
checked immediately.

Do not run the engine in a garage

Keep the back door and back window closed while driving. An open
or unsealed back door and back
window, may cause exhaust gases
to be drawn into the vehicle.

To allow proper operation of your
vehicle’s ventilation system, keep
the inlet grilles in front of the windshield clear of snow, leaves, or other obstructions.

If you smell exhaust fumes in the
vehicle, drive with the windows
open and the back door and back
window closed. Have the cause immediately located and corrected.

or enclosed area except for the
time needed to drive the vehicle in
or out. The exhaust gases cannot
escape, making this a particularly
dangerous situation.

Do not remain for a long time in a
parked vehicle with the engine running. If it is unavoidable, however,
do so only in an unconfined area
and adjust the heating or cooling
system to force outside air into the
vehicle.

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

FUNCTIONS OF ENGINE OIL
Engine oil has the primary functions of
lubricating and cooling the inside of the
engine, and plays a major role in maintaining the engine in proper working order.
ENGINE OIL CONSUMPTION
It is normal that an engine should consume some engine oil during normal
engine operation. The causes of oil
consumption in a normal engine are as
follows.

Oil is used to lubricate pistons, piston
rings and cylinders. A thin film of oil
is left on the cylinder wall when a piston moves downwards in the cylinder.
High negative pressure generated when
the vehicle is decelerating sucks some
of this oil into the combustion chamber.
This oil as well as some part of the oil
film left on the cylinder wall is burned
by the high temperature combustion
gases during the combustion process.

195

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

Twin ground electrode spark
plugs
Oil is also used to lubricate the stems
of the intake valves. Some of this oil
is sucked into the combustion chamber
together with the intake air and is
burned along with the fuel. High temperature exhaust gases also burn the
oil used to lubricate the exhaust valve
stems.
The amount of engine oil consumed depends on the viscosity of the oil, the
quality of the oil and the conditions the
vehicle is driven under.
More oil is consumed by high−speed driving and frequent acceleration and deceleration.
A new engine consumes more oil, since
its pistons, piston rings and cylinder walls
have not become conditioned.
When judging the amount of oil consumption, note that the oil may become
diluted and make it difficult to judge
the true level accurately.
As an example, if a vehicle is used for
repeated short trips, and consumes a normal amount of oil, the dipstick may not
show any drop in the oil level at all, even
after 1000 km (600 miles) or more. This
is because the oil is gradually becoming
diluted with fuel or moisture, making it
appear that the oil level has not changed.

196

The diluting ingredients evaporate out
when the vehicle is then driven at high
speeds, as on an expressway, making it
appear that oil is excessively consumed
after driving at high speeds.
IMPORTANCE OF ENGINE OIL LEVEL
CHECK
One of the most important points in proper vehicle maintenance is to keep the engine oil at the optimum level so that oil
function will not be impaired. Therefore, it
is essential that the oil level be checked
regularly. Toyota recommends that the oil
level be checked every time you refuel
the vehicle.

Your engine is fitted with twin ground
electrode spark plugs.

NOTICE

Failure to check the oil level regularly
could lead to serious engine trouble
due to insufficient oil.
For detailed information on oil level check,
see Checking the engine oil level" in Section 7−2.

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

Use only twin ground electrode spark
plugs and do not adjust gaps for your
engine performance.

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

Brake system
This brake system has 2 independent hydraulic circuits. If either circuit should fail,
the other will still work. However, the pedal will be harder to press, and your stopping distance will be longer. Also, the
brake system warning light may come on.

CAUTION
Do not drive your vehicle with only a
single brake system. Have your
brakes fixed immediately.
BRAKE BOOSTER
The brake booster uses brake fluid pressurized by the pump to power−assist the
brakes. If the brake booster fails during
driving, the brake system warning light
comes on and buzzer sounds continuously. In this case, the brakes may not work
properly. If they do not work well, depress
the brake pedal firmly. If the brake system
warning light comes on, immediately stop
your vehicle and contact your Toyota dealer.

Depressing the brake pedal repeatedly
may turn on the brake system warning
light and buzzer. It is normal if the light
turns off and the buzzer stops sounding
after a few seconds.
You may hear a small sound in the engine
compartment after the engine is started or
the brake pedal is depressed repeatedly.
This is a pump pulsating sound of the
brake system, and it is not a malfunction.

CAUTION

Do not pump the brake pedal if the
engine stalls. Each push on the
pedal uses up your brake fluid
pressure reserve.

Even if the power assist is completely lost, the brakes will still
work. But you will have to push the
pedal hard, much harder than normal. And your braking distance will
be longer.

The brake system warning light may stay
on for about 60 seconds after the ignition
key is turned to the ON" position. It is
normal if the light turns off after a while.

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

ANTI−LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM
(with ABS" warning light)
The anti−lock brake system is designed
to help prevent lock−up of the wheels
during a sudden braking or braking on
slippery road surfaces. This assists in
providing directional stability and steering performance of the vehicle under
these circumstances.
Effective way to press the ABS brake
pedal: When the anti−lock brake system
function is in action, you may feel the
brake pedal pulsating and hear a noise.
In this situation, to let the anti−lock
brake system work for you, just hold the
brake pedal down more firmly. Do not
pump the brake in a panic stop. This
will result in reduced braking performance.
The anti−lock brake system becomes operative after the vehicle has accelerated
to a speed in excess of approximately 10
km/h (6 mph). It stops operating when the
vehicle decelerates to a speed below
approximately 5 km/h (3 mph).

197

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

Depressing the brake pedal on slippery
road surfaces such as on the manhole
cover, the steel plate under the construction, joints in the bridge, etc. on a rainy
day tends to activate the anti−lock brake
system.
You may hear a click or motor sound in
the engine compartment for a few seconds
when the engine is started or just after
the vehicle is started. This means that the
anti−lock brake system is in the self−
check mode, and does not indicate a malfunction.
When the anti−lock brake system is activated, the following conditions may
occur. They do not indicate a malfunction of the system:

You may hear the anti−lock brake system operating and feel the brake pedal
pulsating and the vibrations of the vehicle body and steering wheel. You
may also hear the motor sound in the
engine compartment even after the vehicle is stopped.

At the end of the anti−lock brake system activation, the brake pedal may
move a little forward.

CAUTION
Do not overestimate the anti−lock
brake system: Although the anti−lock
brake system assists in providing vehicle control, it is still important to
drive with all due care and maintain
a moderate speed and safe distance
from the vehicle in front of you, because there are limits to the vehicle
stability and effectiveness of steering
wheel operation even with the anti−
lock brake system on.
If tires grip performance exceeds its
capability, or if hydroplaning occurs
during high speed driving in the rain,
the anti−lock brake system does not
provide vehicle control.
Anti−lock brake system is not designed to shorten the stopping distance: Always drive at the moderate
speed and maintain a safe distance
from the vehicle in front of you.
Compared with vehicles without an
anti−lock brake system, your vehicle
may require a longer stopping distance in the following cases:

Driving on rough, gravel or snow−
covered roads.

198

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

Driving with tire chains installed.
Driving over the steps such as the
joints on the road.

Driving on roads where the road
surface is pitted or has other differences in surface height.
Install all 4 tires of specified size at
appropriate pressure: The anti−lock
brake system detects vehicle speeds
using the speed sensors for respective wheels’ turning speeds. The use
of tires other than specified may fail
to detect the accurate turning speed
resulting in a longer stopping distance.

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

ABS" warning light
The light comes on when the ignition key
is turned to the ON" position. If the anti−
lock brake system and the brake assist
system work properly, the light turns off
after a few seconds. Thereafter, if either
of the systems malfunctions, the light
comes on again.

Type A

When the ABS" warning light is on (and
the brake system warning light is off), the
anti−lock brake system, the brake assist
system, the traction control system (two−
wheel drive vehicles), the active traction
control system (four−wheel drive vehicles)
and the vehicle skid control system do not
operate, but the brake system still operates conventionally.
When the ABS" warning light is on (and
the brake system warning light is off), the
anti−lock brake system does not operate
so that the wheels could lock up during
a sudden braking or braking on slippery
road surfaces.

Type B

TRC" or VSC/TRAC" warning light may
come on with the ABS" warning light
(brake assist system warning light) when
there is a malfunction somewhere in the
anti−lock brake system (brake assist system).

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

The light does not come on when the
ignition key is turned to the ON" position, or remains on.

The light comes on while you are driving.
A warning light turning on briefly during
operation does not indicate a problem.

199

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

Brake pad wear limit indicators
Either of the following conditions do
not indicate the malfunction.

The light may stay on for about 60

For an explanation of this system’s warning light, see Service reminder indicators
and warning buzzers" in Section 1−5.

seconds after the ignition key is turned
to the ON" position. It is normal if it
turns off after a while.

Depressing the brake pedal repeatedly
may turn on the light. It is normal if it
turns off after a few seconds.
BRAKE ASSIST SYSTEM
When you slam the brakes on, the
brake assist system judges as an emergency stop and provides more powerful
braking for a driver who cannot hold
down the brake pedal firmly.

The brake pad wear limit indicators on
your disc brakes give a warning noise
when the brake pads are worn to where
replacement is required.

When you slam the brakes on, more powerful braking will be applied. At this time,
you may hear a sound in the engine
compartment and feel the vibrations of the
brake pedal. This does not indicate a malfunction.

If you hear a squealing or scraping noise
while driving, have the brake pads
checked and replaced by your Toyota
dealer as soon as possible. Expensive rotor damage can result if the pads are not
replaced when necessary.

The brake assist system becomes operative after the vehicle has accelerated to
a speed in excess of approximately 10
km/h (6 mph). It stops operating when the
vehicle decelerates to a speed below
approximately 5 km/h (3 mph).

200

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

Your Toyota’s identification
Vehicle identification
number

Luggage stowage precautions
When stowing luggage or cargo in the
vehicle, observe the following:

Put luggage or cargo in the luggage
compartment when at all possible. Be
sure all items are secured in place.

Be careful to keep the vehicle balanced. Locating the weight as far forward as possible helps maintain balance.

For better fuel economy, do not carry
unneeded weight.

CAUTION

To prevent luggage or packages
from sliding forward during braking,
do not stack anything in the luggage compartment higher than the
seatbacks. Keep luggage or packages low, as close to the floor as
possible.

Do not place anything on the flat-

Never allow anyone to ride in the
luggage compartment. It is not designed for passengers. They should
ride in their seats with their seat
belts properly fastened. Otherwise,
they are much more likely to suffer
serious bodily injury, in the event
of sudden braking or a collision.

Do not place anything on the luggage cover. Such items may be
thrown about and possibly injure
people in the vehicle during sudden
braking or an accident. Secure all
items in a safe place.

Do not drive with objects left on
top of the instrument panel. They
may interfere with the driver’s field
of view. Or they may move during
sharp vehicle acceleration or turning, and impair the driver’s control
of the vehicle. In an accident they
may injure the vehicle occupants.

The vehicle identification number (VIN)
is the legal identifier for your vehicle.
This number is on the left top of the
instrument panel, and can be seen
through the windshield from outside.
This is the primary identification number
for your Toyota. It is used in registering
the ownership of your vehicle.

tened seat or it may slide forward
during braking.

NOTICE
Do not load the vehicle beyond the
vehicle capacity weight specified in
Section 8.

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

201

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

Engine number

Theft prevention labels
(except for Canada)
Your new vehicle carries theft prevention labels which are approximately 56
mm (2.20 in.) by 16 mm (0.63 in.).
The purpose of these labels is to reduce
the incidence of vehicle thefts by facilitating the tracing and recovery of parts from
stolen vehicles. The label is designed so
that once it is applied to a surface, any
attempt to remove it will result in destroying the integrity of the label. Transferring
these labels intact from one part to another, will be impossible.

NOTICE
The vehicle identification number (VIN) is
also on the Certification Label.

202

The engine number is stamped on the
engine block as shown.

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

You should not attempt to remove the
theft prevention labels as it may violate certain state or federal laws.

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

Suspension and chassis

Types of tires

CAUTION

Determine what kind of tires your vehicle is originally equipped with.

Do not modify the suspension/chassis
with lift kits, spacers, springs, etc. It
can cause dangerous handling characteristics resulting in loss of control.

Summer tires are high−speed capability
tires best suited to highway driving under
dry conditions.

1. Summer tires

Since summer tires do not have the same
traction performance as snow tires, summer tires are inadequate for driving on
snow−covered or icy roads. For driving on
snow−covered or icy roads, we recommend using snow tires. If installing snow
tires, be sure to replace all four tires.

CAUTION

Do not mix summer and all season
tires on your vehicle as this can
cause dangerous handling characteristics, resulting in loss of control.

Do not use tire other than the
manufacturer’s designated tires, and
never mix tires or wheels of the
sizes different from the originals.

2. All season tires
All season tires are designed to provide
better traction in snow and to be adequate
for driving in most winter conditions, as
well as for use all year round.
All season tires, however, do not have
adequate traction performance compared
with snow tires in heavy or loose snow.
Also, all season tires fall short in acceleration
and
handling
performance
compared with summer tires in highway
driving.

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

203

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

204

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

SECTION

STARTING AND DRIVING
Before starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to start the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tips for driving in various conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Off−road driving precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Winter driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dinghy towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to save fuel and make your vehicle last longer, too . . . . . . . . .

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

206
206
207
208
210
211
211
217

205

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

Before starting the engine
1. Check the area around the vehicle before entering it.
2. Adjust seat position, seatback angle,
seat cushion angle, head restraint
height and steering wheel angle.
3. Adjust the inside and outside rear view
mirrors.
4. Lock all doors.
5. Fasten seat belts.

How to start the engine
(a) Before cranking
1. Apply the parking brake firmly.
2. Turn off unnecessary lights and accessories.

(b) Starting the engine
Before starting the engine, be sure to follow the instructions in (a) Before cranking".

3. Put the selector lever in P". If you
need to restart the engine while the
vehicle is moving, put the selector lever in N". A starter safety device will
prevent the starter from operating if the
selector lever is in any drive position.

Normal starting procedure

4. Depress the brake pedal and hold it to
the floor until driving off.

1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, crank the engine by turning the key
to START". Release it when the engine starts.

The multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection system in your
engine automatically controls the proper
air−fuel mixture for starting. You can start
a cold or hot engine as follows:

2. After the engine runs for about 10 seconds, you are ready to drive.
If the weather is below freezing, let the
engine warm up for a few minutes before
driving.
If the engine stalls...
Simply restart it, using the correct procedure given in normal starting.
If the engine will not start...
See If your vehicle will not start" in Section 4.

206

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

NOTICE
z Do not crank for more than 30 seconds at a time. This may overheat
the starter and wiring systems.
z Do not race a cold engine.
z If the engine becomes difficult to
start or stalls frequently, have the
engine checked immediately.

Tips for driving in various
conditions
Always slow down in gusty crosswinds.
This will allow you much better control.

Drive slowly onto curbs and, if possible, at a right angle. Avoid driving
onto high, sharp−edged objects and
other road hazards. Failure to do so
can lead to severe tire damage resulting in tire bursts.

When parking on a hill, turn the front
wheels until they touch the curb so
that the vehicle will not roll. Apply the
parking brake, and place the transmission in P". If necessary, block the
wheels.

Washing your vehicle or driving through
deep water may get the brakes wet. To
see whether they are wet, check that
there is no traffic near you, and then
press the pedal lightly. If you do not
feel a normal braking force, the brakes
are probably wet. To dry them, drive
the vehicle cautiously while lightly
pressing the brake pedal with the parking brake applied. If they still do not
work safely, pull to the side of the road
and call a Toyota dealer for assistance.

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

Four−wheel drive modelsToyota recommends not using four−wheel drive on
dry hard−surfaced roads, because four−
wheel driving will cause unnecessary
noise and wear, and poor fuel economy.

Four−wheel drive modelsIn cold temperatures, noise may occur when driving in two−wheel drive before the transfer is warmed up. Therefore, first drive
in four−wheel drive until the transfer is
warmed up.

CAUTION

Before driving off, make sure that
the parking brake is fully released
and the parking brake reminder
light is off.

Do not leave your vehicle unattended while the engine is running.

Do not rest your foot on the brake
pedal while driving. It can cause
dangerous overheating, needless
wear, and poor fuel economy.

207

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

Off−road driving precautions
To drive down a long or steep hill,

Do not continue normal driving

reduce your speed and downshift.
Remember, if you ride the brakes
excessively, they may overheat and
not work properly.

when the brakes are wet. If they are
wet, your vehicle will require a
longer stopping distance, and it
may pull to one side when the
brakes are applied. Also, the parking brake will not hold the vehicle
securely.

Be careful when accelerating, upshifting, downshifting or braking on
a slippery surface. Sudden acceleration or engine braking, could cause
the vehicle to spin or skid.

When driving your vehicle off−road, please
observe the following precautions to ensure your driving enjoyment and to help
prevent the closure of areas to off−road
vehicles.
a. Drive your vehicle only in areas where
off−road vehicles are permitted to travel.
b. Respect private property. Get owner’s
permission before entering private property.
c. Do not enter areas that are closed.
Honor gates, barriers and signs that restrict travel.

Do not drive in excess of the speed
limit. Even if the legal speed limit
permits it, do not drive over 140
km/h (85 mph) unless your vehicle
has high−speed capability tires.
Driving over 140 km/h (85 mph) may
result in tire failure, loss of control
and possible injury. Be sure to consult a tire dealer to determine
whether the tires on your vehicle
are high−speed capability tires or
not before driving at such speeds.

d. Stay on established roads. When conditions are wet, driving techniques should
be changed or travel delayed to prevent
damage to roads.
For owners in U.S. mainland, Hawaii and
Puerto Rico:
To obtain additional information pertaining
to driving your vehicle off−road, consult
the following organizations.

State and Local Parks and Recreation
Departments

State Motor Vehicle Bureau
Recreational Vehicle Clubs
U.S. Forest Service and Bureau of
Land Management

208

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

CAUTION
Always observe the following precautions to minimize the risk of serious
personal injury or damage to your vehicle:

Drive carefully when off the road.
Do not take unnecessary risks by
driving in dangerous places.

Do not grip the steering wheel
spokes when driving off−road. A
bad bump could jerk the wheel and
injure your hands. Keep both hands
and especially your thumbs on the
outside of the rim.

Always check your brakes for effectiveness immediately after driving in
sand, mud, water or snow.

After driving through tall grass,
mud, rock, sand, rivers, etc., check
that there is no grass, bush, paper,
rags, stone, sand, etc. adhering or
trapped on the underbody. Clear off
any such matter from the underbody. If the vehicle is used with
these materials trapped or adhering
to the underbody, a breakdown or
fire could occur.

NOTICE
z If driving through water, such as
when crossing shallow streams,
first check the depth of the water
and the bottom of the river bed for
firmness. Drive slowly and avoid
deep water.

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

z Take all necessary safety measures
to ensure that water damage to the
engine or other components does
not occur.
Water entering the engine air intake
will cause severe engine damage.
Water can wash the grease from
wheel bearings, causing rusting and
premature failure, and may also enter the differentials, transmission
and transfer case, reducing the gear
oil’s lubricating qualities.
z Sand and mud that has accumulated
in brake drums and around brake
discs may affect braking efficiency
and may damage brake system components.
z Always perform a maintenance inspection after each day of off−road
driving that has taken you through
rough terrain, sand, mud, or water.
For scheduled maintenance information, refer to the Scheduled Maintenance Guide" or Owner’s Manual
Supplement".

209

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

Winter driving tips
Make sure you have a proper freeze
protection of engine coolant.

Make sure the engine oil viscosity is
suitable for the cold weather.

Do not use your parking brake when
there is a possibility it could freeze.

Your coolant must contain ethylene−glycol
type coolant for a proper corrosion
protection of aluminum components. Use
TOYOTA Long Life Coolant" or equivalent.

See Section 7−2 for recommended viscosity. Leaving a heavy summer oil in your
vehicle during winter months may cause
harder starting. If you are not sure about
which oil to use, call your Toyota dealer
he will be pleased to help.

When parking, put the transmission into
P" and block the front wheels. Do not
use the parking brake, or snow or water
accumulated in and around the parking
brake mechanism may freeze, making it
hard to release.

Keep the door locks from freezing.

Keep ice and snow from accumulating
under the fenders.

See Section 7−2 for details about coolant
type selection.

NOTICE
Do not use alcohol type antifreeze or
plain water alone.

Squirt lock de−icer or glycerine into the
locks to keep them from freezing.
Use a washer fluid containing an antifreeze solution.

When it is extremely cold, we recommend
to use 60% solution for your Toyota, to
provide protection down to about −50C
(−58F). Do not use more than 70% solution for better coolant performance.

This product is available at your Toyota
dealer and most auto parts stores. Follow
the manufacturer’s directions for how
much to mix with water.

Check the condition of the battery and
cables.

NOTICE

Cold temperatures reduce the capacity of
any battery, so it must be in top shape
to provide enough power for winter starting. Section 7−3 tells you how to visually
inspect the battery. Your Toyota dealer
and most service stations will be pleased
to check the level of charge.

210

Do not use engine antifreeze or any
other substitute because it may damage your vehicle’s paint.

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

Ice and snow built up under your fenders
can make steering difficult. During bad
winter driving, stop and check under the
fenders occasionally.
Depending on where you are driving,
we recommend you carry some emergency equipment.
Some of the things you might put in the
vehicle are tire chains, window scraper,
bag of sand or salt, flares, small shovel,
jumper cables, etc.

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

Dinghy towing

Trailer towing
Your vehicle is designed primarily as a
passenger−and−load−carrying vehicle. Towing a trailer will have an adverse effect on
handling, performance, braking, durability
and driving economy (fuel consumption,
etc.). Your safety and satisfaction depend
on the proper use of correct equipment
and cautious driving habits. For your safety and the safety of others, you must not
overload your vehicle or trailer. Ask your
local Toyota dealer for further details before towing.
WEIGHT LIMITS

Your vehicle is not designed to be
dinghy towed (with four wheels on the
ground) behind a motorhome.

NOTICE
Do not tow your vehicle with four
wheels on the ground. This may
cause serious damage to your vehicle.

Before towing, make sure the total trailer weight, gross combination weight,
gross vehicle weight, gross axle weight
and trailer tongue load are all within
the limits.
The total trailer weight and tongue load
can be measured with platform scales
found at a highway weighing station, building supply company, trucking company,
junk yard, etc.

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

CAUTION

The maximum gross trailer weight
(trailer weight plus cargo weight)
must never exceed 2267 kg (5000
lb.).
If towing a trailer and cargo weighing over 907kg (2000lb.), it is
necessary to use a sway control
device with sufficient capacity. The
combination of the gross trailer
weight added to the total weight of
the vehicle, occupants and vehicle
cargo must never exceed a total of
the following.
Two−wheel drive models
3992 kg (8800 lb.)
Four−wheel drive models
4173 kg (9200 lb.)
Exceeding the maximum weight of
the trailer, the vehicle, or the vehicle and trailer combination, can
cause an accident resulting in serious personal injuries.

211

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

The gross vehicle weight must not
exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating (GVWR) indicated on the
Certification Label. The gross vehicle weight is the sum of weights of
the unloaded vehicle, driver, passengers, luggage, hitch and trailer
tongue load. It also includes the
weight of any special equipment
installed on your vehicle.

The load on either the front or rear
Trailer hitch assemblies have different weight capacities established by
the hitch manufacturer. Even though
the vehicle may be physically capable of towing a higher weight, the
operator must determine the maximum weight rating of the particular
hitch assembly and never exceed
the maximum weight rating specified for the trailer−hitch. Exceeding
the maximum weight rating set by
the trailer hitch manufacturer can
cause an accident resulting in serious personal injuries.

212

axle resulting from distribution of
the gross vehicle weight on both
axles must not exceed the Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) listed
on the Certification Label.

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

Total trailer weight

Tongue load
Total trailer weight

Tongue load

100
(∗ 2)

15% (∗ 1) or
9 to 11%

The trailer cargo load should be
distributed so that the tongue load
is 15% for weight distributing hitch
(∗1 ) or 9 to 11% for weight carrying
hitch (∗2 ) of the total trailer weight,
not exceeding the maximum of 226
kg (500 lb.). Never load the trailer
with more weight in the back than
in the front. About 60% of the trailer load should be in the front half
of the trailer and the remaining 40%
in the rear.

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

HITCHES

BRAKES AND SAFETY CHAINS

Use only a hitch recommended by the

Toyota

hitch manufacturer and the one which
conforms to the total trailer weight
requirement.

recommends trailers with
brakes that conform to any applicable federal and state/provincial regulations.

The hitch must be bolted securely to

A safety chain must always be used

the vehicle frame and installed according to the hitch manufacturer’s instructions.

between the towing vehicle and the
trailer. Leave sufficient slack in the
chain for turns. The chain should
cross under the trailer tongue to
prevent the tongue from dropping to
the ground in case it becomes damaged or separated. For correct safety
chain procedures, follow the hitch or
trailer manufacturer’s recommendations.

The hitch ball and king pin should have
a light coat of grease.

Toyota recommends removing the hitch
when not towing to prevent injury and/
or damage due to the hitch in event of
a rear end collision. After removal of
the hitch, seal the installation area to
prevent entry of exhaust fumes and
mud.

NOTICE
Do not use an axle−mounting hitch as
it may cause damage to the axle
housing, wheel bearings, wheels and
or tires.

Never tow a trailer without using a
safety chain securely attached to
both the trailer and the vehicle. If
damage occurs to the coupling unit
or hitch ball, there is danger of the
trailer wandering over into another
lane.
TIRES

Ensure that your vehicle’s tires are
properly inflated. See Section 7−2 for
instructions.

The trailer tires should be inflated to
the pressure recommended by the trailer manufacturer in respect to the total
trailer weight.

CAUTION

If the total trailer weight exceeds
453 kg (1000 lb.), trailer brakes are
required.

Never tap into your vehicle’s hydraulic system as it would lower its
braking effectiveness.

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

213

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

BREAK−IN SCHEDULE

PRE−TOWING SAFETY CHECK

Toyota recommends that you do not

Check that your vehicle remains level

tow a trailer with a new vehicle or a
vehicle with any new power train component (engine, transmission, differential, wheel bearing, etc.) for the first
800 km (500 miles) of driving.

when a loaded or unloaded trailer is
hitched. Do not drive if the vehicle has
an abnormal nose−up or nose−down
condition, and check for improper
tongue load, overload, worn suspension
or other possible causes.

MAINTENANCE

If you tow a trailer, your vehicle will

TRAILER LIGHTS

Your vehicle is equipped with a wire
harness stored in the rear end under
body. Some models are fitted with a
socket for trailer lights under the rear
bumper. Use either of them to connect
and operate the trailer lights. However,
the trailer lights must comply with federal, state/provincial and local regulations. See your local recreational vehicle dealer or rental agency for the
correct type of wiring and relays for
your trailer. Check for correct operation
of the turn signals and stop lights each
time you hitch up. Direct splicing may
damage your vehicle’s electrical system
and cause a malfunction of your lights.

214

require more frequent maintenance due
to the additional load. For this information, please refer to the scheduled
maintenance information in the Scheduled Maintenance Guide" or Owner’s
Manual Supplement".

Retighten all fixing bolts of the towing
ball and bracket after approximately
1000 km (600 miles) of trailer driving.

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

Make sure the trailer cargo is securely
loaded so that it cannot shift.

Check that your rear view mirrors conform to any applicable federal, state/
provincial or local regulations. If not,
install the rear view mirrors required
for towing purpose.

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

TRAILER TOWING TIPS
When towing a trailer, your vehicle will
handle differently than when not towing. The three main causes of vehicle−
trailer accidents are driver error, excessive speed and improper trailer loading.
Keep these in mind when towing:

Before starting out, check operation of
the lights and all vehicle−trailer connections. After driving a short distance,
stop and recheck the lights and connections. Before actually towing a trailer, practice turning, stopping and backing with a trailer in an area away from
traffic until you learn the feel.

Backing with a trailer is difficult and
requires practice. Grip the bottom of
the steering wheel and move your hand
to the left to move the trailer to the
left. Move your hand to the right to
move the trailer to the right. (This procedure is generally opposite to that
when backing without a trailer). Also,
just turn the steering wheel a little at
a time, avoiding sharp or prolonged
turning. Have someone guide you when
backing to reduce the risk of an accident.

Because stopping distance may be in-

Crosswinds and rough roads will ad-

creased, vehicle−to−vehicle distance
should be increased when towing a
trailer. For each 16 km/h (10 mph) of
speed, allow at least one vehicle and
trailer length between you and the vehicle ahead. Avoid sudden braking as
you may skid, resulting in jackknifing
and loss of control. This is especially
true on wet or slippery surfaces.

versely affect handling of your vehicle
and trailer, causing sway. Pay attention
to the rear from time to time to prepare yourself for being passed by large
trucks or buses, which may cause your
vehicle and trailer to sway. If swaying
happens, firmly grip the steering wheel
and reduce speed immediately but
gradually. Never increase speed. Steer
straight ahead. If you make no extreme
correction with the steering or brakes,
the vehicle and trailer will stabilize.

Avoid jerky starts or sudden acceleration.

Avoid jerky steering and sharp turns.
The trailer could hit your vehicle in a
tight turn. Slow down before making a
turn to avoid the necessity of sudden
braking.

Remember that when making a turn,
the trailer wheels will be closer than
the vehicle wheels to the inside of the
turn. Therefore, compensate for this by
making a larger than normal turning
radius with your vehicle.

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

Be careful when passing other vehicles. Passing requires considerable
distance. After passing a vehicle, do
not forget the length of your trailer and
be sure you have plenty of room before changing lanes.

In order to maintain engine braking efficiency, do not use overdrive.

Because of the added load of the trailer, your vehicle’s engine may overheat
on hot days (at temperatures over
30C [85F]) when going up a long or
steep grade with a trailer. If the engine
coolant temperature gauge indicates
overheating, immediately turn off the air
conditioning (if in use), pull off the road
and stop in a safe spot. Refer to If
your vehicle overheats" in Section 4.

215

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

Always place wheel blocks under both
the vehicle and trailer wheels when
parking. Apply the parking brake firmly.
Put the transmission in P". Avoid parking on a slope with a trailer, but if it
cannot be avoided, do so only after
performing the following:
1. Apply the brakes and hold.
2. Have someone place wheel blocks under both the vehicle and trailer wheels.
3. When the wheel blocks are in place,
release your brakes slowly until the
blocks absorb the load.
4. Apply the parking brake firmly.
5. Shift into P" and turn off the engine.

216

When restarting out after parking on a
slope:
1. With the transmission in P" position,
start the engine. Be sure to keep the
brake pedal depressed.
2. Shift into gear.
3. Release the parking brake and brake
pedal and slowly pull or back away
from the wheel blocks. Stop and apply
your brakes.
4. Have someone retrieve the blocks.

CAUTION

Do not exceed 72 km/h (45 mph) or
the posted towing speed limit,
whichever is lower. Because instability (swaying) of a towing vehicle−
trailer
combination
usually
increases as the speed increases, exceeding 72 km/h (45 mph) may
cause loss of control.

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

Slow down and downshift before
descending steep or long downhill
grades. Do not make sudden downshifts.

Avoid holding the brake pedal down
too long or too frequently. This
could cause the brakes to overheat
and result in reduced braking efficiency.

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

How to save fuel and make
your vehicle last longer, too
Getting more kilometers/mileage from a
liter/gallon of fuel is easyjust take it
easy. It will help make your vehicle last
longer, too. Here are some specific tips
on how to save money on both fuel and
repairs:

Keep your tires inflated at the correct pressure. Underinflation causes
tire wear and wastes fuel. See Section
7−2 for instructions.

Do not carry unneeded weight in
your vehicle. Excess weight puts a
heavier load on the engine, causing
greater fuel consumption.

Avoid lengthy warm−up idling. Once
the engine is running smoothly, begin
drivingbut gently. Remember, however, that on cold winter days this may
take a little longer.

Keep

the automatic transmission
overdrive turned on when engine
braking is not required. Driving with
the overdrive off will reduce the fuel
economy. (For details, see Automatic
transmission" in Section 1−6.)

Accelerate

slowly and smoothly.
Avoid jackrabbit starts. Get into high
gear as quickly as possible.

Avoid long engine idling. If you have

Keep the front wheels in proper

a long wait and you are not in traffic,
it is better to turn off the engine and
start again later.

alignment. Avoid hitting the curb and
slow down on rough roads. Improper
alignment not only causes faster tire
wear but also puts an extra load on
the engine, which, in turn, wastes fuel.

Avoid engine lugging or over−revving. Use a gear position suitable for
the road on which you are travelling.

Avoid continuous speeding up and
slowing down.
wastes fuel.

Stop−and−go

driving

Avoid

unnecessary stopping and
braking. Maintain a steady pace. Try
to time the traffic signals so you only
need to stop as little as possible or
take advantage of through streets to
avoid traffic lights. Keep a proper distance from other vehicles to avoid sudden braking. This will also reduce wear
on your brakes.

Avoid heavy traffic or traffic jams
whenever possible.

Do not rest your foot on the brake
pedal. This causes premature wear,
overheating and poor fuel economy.

Keep the bottom of your vehicle free
from mud, etc. This not only lessens
weight but also helps prevent corrosion.

Keep your vehicle tuned−up and in
top shape. A dirty air cleaner, improper valve clearance, dirty plugs, dirty oil
and grease,brakes not adjusted, etc. all
lower engine performance and contribute to poor fuel economy. For longer
life of all parts and lower operating
costs, keep all maintenance work on
schedule, and if you often drive under
severe conditions, see that your vehicle
receives more frequent maintenance.
(For scheduled maintenance information, please refer to the Scheduled
Maintenance Guide" or Owner’s Manual Supplement").

Maintain a moderate speed on highways. The faster you drive, the greater
the fuel consumption. By reducing your
speed, you will cut down on fuel consumption.
2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

217

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

CAUTION
Never turn off the engine to coast
down hills. Your power steering and
brake booster will not function without the engine running. Also, the
emission control system operates
properly only when the engine is running.

218

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

SECTION

IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
If your vehicle will not start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If your engine stalls while driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If your vehicle overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If you have a flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If your vehicle needs to be towed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If you cannot shift automatic transmission selector lever . . . . . . . .
If you lose your keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If you lose your wireless remote control transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

220
223
223
224
231
236
238
238

219

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

If your vehicle will not start
(a) Simple checks
Before making these checks, make sure
you have followed the correct starting
procedure given in How to start the
engine" in Section 3 and that you have
sufficient fuel. If your vehicle is equipped
with the engine immobiliser system, also
check whether the other keys will start the
engine. If they work, your key may be
broken. Have the key checked at your
Toyota dealer. If none of your keys work,
the system is possibly broken. Call your
Toyota dealer. (See Keys (with engine
immobiliser system)" in Section 1−2.)
If the engine is not turning over or is
turning over too slowly
1. Check that the battery terminals are
tight and clean.

(b) Starting a flooded engine
NOTICE
Do not pull− or push−start the vehicle. It may damage the vehicle or
cause a collision when the engine
starts. Also the three−way catalytic
converter may overheat and become a
fire hazard.
If the engine turns over at its normal
speed but will not start
1. The engine may be flooded because of
repeated cranking. See (b) Starting a
flooded engine" for further instructions.
2. If the engine still will not start, it needs
adjustment or repair. Call a Toyota
dealer or qualified repair shop.

2. If the battery terminals are O.K., switch
on the interior light.

If this happens, turn the key to START"
with the accelerator pedal held down.
Keep the key and accelerator pedal in
these position for 15 seconds and release
them. Then try starting the engine with
your foot off the accelerator pedal.
If the engine does not start after 15 seconds of cranking, release the key, wait
a few minutes and try again.
If the engine still will not start, it needs
adjustment or repair. Call a Toyota dealer
or qualified repair shop for assistance.

NOTICE
Do not crank for more than 30 seconds at a time. This may overheat
the starter and wiring systems.

3. If the light is out, dim or goes out
when the starter is cranked, the battery
is discharged. You may try jump starting. See (c) Jump starting" for further
instructions.
If the light is O.K., but the engine still will
not start, it needs adjustment or repair.
Call a Toyota dealer or qualified repair
shop.

220

If the engine will not start, your engine
may be flooded because of repeated
cranking.

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

(c) Jump starting
To avoid serious personal injury and
damage to your vehicle which might result from battery explosion, acid burns,
electrical burns, or damaged electronic
components, these instructions must be
followed precisely.
If you are unsure about how to follow this
procedure, we strongly recommend that
you seek the help of a competent mechanic or towing service.

CAUTION

Batteries

contain
sulfuric
acid
which is poisonous and corrosive.
Wear protective safety glasses when
jump starting, and avoid spilling
acid on your skin, clothing, or vehicle.

The gas normally produced by a
battery will explode if a flame or
spark is brought near. Use only
standardized jumper cables and do
not smoke or light a match while
jump starting.

NOTICE
The battery used for boosting must
be 12 V. Do not jump start unless you
are sure that the booster battery is
correct.

JUMP STARTING PROCEDURE
1. If the booster battery is installed in
another vehicle, make sure the vehicles
are not touching. Turn off all unnecessary lights and accessories.
2. If required, remove all the vent plugs
from the booster and discharged batteries. Lay a cloth over the open vents
on the batteries. (This helps reduce the
explosion hazard, personal injuries and
burns.)
3. If the engine in the vehicle with the
booster battery is not running, start it
and let it run for a few minutes. During
jump starting run the engine at about
2000 rpm with the accelerator pedal
lightly depressed.

If you should accidentally get acid
on yourself or in your eyes, remove
any contaminated clothing and flush
the affected area with water immediately. Then get immediate medical
attention. If possible, continue to
apply water with a sponge or cloth
while en route to the medical office.

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

221

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

Discharged
battery

Jumper cable

Booster
battery
Positive
terminal
(+" mark)
Jumper cable

Positive terminal
(+" mark)

4. Make the cable connections in the order a, b, c, d.
a. Connect the clamp of the positive
(red) jumper cable to the positive (+)
terminal on the discharged battery.
b. Connect the clamp at the other end
of the positive (red) jumper cable to
the positive (+) terminal on the booster
battery.

222

Negative
terminal
(−" mark)

Discharged
battery

Booster battery
c. Connect the clamp of the negative
(black) jumper cable to the negative (−)
terminal on the booster battery.
d. Connect the clamp at the other end
of the negative (black) jumper cable to
a solid, stationary, unpainted, metallic
point of the vehicle with the discharged
battery.
The recommended connecting point is
shown in the following illustration:

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

Connecting point

Do not connect it to or near any part
that moves when the engine is
cranked.

CAUTION
When making the connections, to
avoid serious injury, do not lean over
the battery or accidentally let the
jumper cables or clamps touch anything except the correct battery terminals or the ground.

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

If your engine stalls while
driving
5. Start your engine in the normal way.
After starting, run it at about 2000 rpm
for several minutes with the accelerator
pedal lightly depressed.

If your engine stalls while driving...

6. Carefully disconnect the cables in the
exact reverse order: the negative cable
and then the positive cable.

2. Turn on your emergency flashers.

7. Carefully dispose of the battery cover
clothsthey may now contain sulfuric
acid.

If the engine will not start, see If your
vehicle will not start".

8. If removed, replace all the battery vent
plugs.
If the cause of your battery discharging is
not apparent (for example, lights left on),
you should have it checked.

1. Reduce your speed gradually, keeping
a straight line. Move cautiously off the
road to a safe place.
3. Try starting the engine again.

CAUTION
If the engine is not running, the power assist for the brakes and steering
will not work so steering and braking
will be much harder than usual.

If your vehicle overheats
If your engine coolant temperature
gauge indicates overheating, if you experience a loss of power, or if you hear
a loud knocking or pinging noise, the
engine has probably overheated. You
should follow this procedure...
1. Pull safely off the road, stop the vehicle and turn on your emergency
flashers. Put the transmission in P"
and apply the parking brake. Turn off
the air conditioning if it is being used.
2. If coolant or steam is boiling out of the
radiator or reservoir, stop the engine.
Wait until the steam subsides before
opening the hood. If there is no coolant
boiling over or steam, leave the engine
running.

CAUTION
To help avoid personal injury, keep
the hood closed until there is no
steam. Escaping steam or coolant is
a sign of very high pressure.

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

223

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

If you have a flat tire
3. Visually check to see if the engine
drive belt (fan belt) is broken or loose.
Look for obvious coolant leaks from the
radiator, hoses, and under the vehicle.
However, note that water draining from
the air conditioning is normal if it has
been used.

CAUTION
Do not attempt to remove the radiator
cap when the engine and radiator are
hot. Serious injury could result from
scalding hot fluid and steam blown
out under pressure.

CAUTION
When the engine is running, keep
hands and clothing away from the
moving fan and engine drive belts.
4. If the engine drive belt is broken or the
coolant is leaking, stop the engine immediately. Call a Toyota dealer for assistance.

7. After the engine coolant temperature
has cooled to normal, again check the
coolant level in the reservoir. If necessary, bring it up to half full again. Serious coolant loss indicates a leak in the
system. You should have it checked as
soon as possible at your Toyota dealer.

2. Stop the engine and
emergency flashers.

turn on

your

3. Firmly set the parking brake and put
the transmission in P".
4. Have everyone get out of the vehicle
on the side away from traffic.
5. Read the following instructions thoroughly.

CAUTION
When jacking, be sure to observe the
following to reduce the possibility of
personal injury:

5. If the engine drive belt is O.K. and
there are no obvious leaks, you may
help the engine cool down more quickly
by running it at about 1500 rpm for a
few minutes with the accelerator pedal
lightly depressed.

Follow jacking instructions.
Do not put any part of your body
under the vehicle supported by the
jack. Personal injury may occur.

6. Check the coolant reservoir. If it is dry,
add coolant to the reservoir while the
engine is running. Fill it about half full.

224

1. Reduce your speed gradually, keeping
a straight line. Move cautiously off the
road to a safe place well away from
the traffic. Avoid stopping on the center
divider of a highway. Park on a level
spot with firm ground.

Do not start or run the engine while
your vehicle is supported by the
jack.

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

Required tools and spare tire
Stop the vehicle on a level firm
ground, firmly set the parking brake
and put the transmission in P".
Block the wheel diagonally opposite
to the one being changed if necessary.

NOTICE

Cover
(on some models)

Do not continue driving with a deflated tire. Driving even a short distance can damage a tire and wheel
beyond repair.

Make sure to set the jack properly
in the jack point. Raising the vehicle with jack improperly positioned will damage the vehicle or
may allow the vehicle to fall off the
jack and cause personal injury.

Never get under the vehicle when

1. Get the required tools and spare
tire.

the vehicle is supported by the jack
alone.

Use the jack only for lifting your

1. Tool bag
2. Jack handle
3. Jack

vehicle during wheel changing.

Do not raise the vehicle with some-

To prepare yourself for an emergency, you
should familiarize yourself with the use of
the jack, each of the tools and their storage locations.

one in the vehicle.

When raising the vehicle, do not
put an object on or under the jack.

Raise the vehicle only high enough
to remove and change the tire.

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

225

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

Blocking the wheel

Turn the jack joint by hand.

To remove the spare tire:

To remove: Turn the joint in direction 1
until the jack is free.
To store: Turn the joint in direction 2 until
the jack is firmly secured to prevent it
flying forward during a collision or sudden
braking.

1. Insert the end of the jack handle into
the lowering screw and turn it counterclockwise.
2. After the tire is lowered completely to
the ground, remove the holding bracket.
When storing the spare tire, put it in place
with the outer side of the wheel facing up.
Then secure the tire, taking care that the
tire goes straight up without catching on
any other part, to prevent it from flying
forward during a collision or sudden braking.

226

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

2. Block the wheel diagonally opposite
the flat tire to keep the vehicle from
rolling when it is jacked up.
When blocking the wheel, place a wheel
block from the front for the front wheels
or from the rear for the rear wheels.

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

Removing wheel ornament

Loosening wheel nuts
3. Remove the wheel ornament.
Pry off the wheel ornament, using the
beveled end of the wheel nut wrench as
shown.

CAUTION
Do not try to pull off the ornament by
hand. Take due care in handling the
ornament to avoid unexpected personal injury.

Steel wheels

4. Loosen all the wheel nuts.
Always loosen the wheel nuts before raising the vehicle.
Turn the wheel nuts counterclockwise to
loosen. To get maximum leverage, fit the
wrench to the nut so that the handle is
on the right side, as shown above. Grab
the wrench near the end of the handle
and pull up on the handle. Be careful that
the wrench does not slip off the nut.
Do not remove the nuts yetjust unscrew
them about one−half turn.

Aluminum wheels
2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

227

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

Positioning the jack

Raising your vehicle
CAUTION
Never get under the vehicle when the
vehicle is supported by the jack
alone.

Front

Rear

5. Position the jack at the correct jack
point as shown.
Make sure the jack is positioned on a
level and solid place.

6. After making sure that no one is in
the vehicle, raise it high enough so
that the spare tire can be installed.
Remember you will need more ground
clearance when putting on the spare tire
than when removing the flat tire.
To raise the vehicle, insert the jack handle
extension in to the jack (it is a loose fit)
and turn it clockwise with the handle,
making sure the handle remains firmly
fitted onto the jack handle extension. As
the jack touches the vehicle and begins
to fit, double−check that it is properly
positioned.

228

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

Changing wheels

7. Remove the wheel nuts and change
tires.
Lift the flat tire straight off and put it
aside.
Roll the spare wheel into position and
align the holes in the wheel with the bolts.
Then lift up the wheel and get at least the
top bolt started through its hole. Wiggle
the tire and press it back over the other
bolts.

Reinstalling wheel nuts

Before putting on wheels, remove any corrosion on the mounting surfaces with a
wire brush or such. Installation of wheels
without good metal−to−metal contact at the
mounting surface can cause wheel nuts to
loosen and eventually cause a wheel to
come off while driving. Therefore after the
first 1600 km (1000 miles), check to see
that the wheel nuts are tight.

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

8. Reinstall all the wheel nuts finger
tight.
Reinstall the wheel nuts (tapered end inward) and tighten them as much as you
can by hand. Press back on the tire back
and see if you can tighten them more.

229

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

Lowering your vehicle

Reinstalling wheel ornament
CAUTION
When lowering the vehicle, make sure
all portions of your body and all other persons around will not be injured
as the vehicle is lowered to the
ground.

Steel wheels

9. Lower the vehicle completely and
tighten the wheel nuts.
Turn the jack handle extension counterclockwise with handle to lower the vehicle,
making sure the handle remains firmly
fitted onto the jack handle extension.
Use only the wheel nut wrench and turn
it clockwise to tighten the nuts. Do not
use other tools or any additional leverage
other than your hands, such as a hammer,
pipe or your foot. Make sure the wrench
is securely engaged over the nut.
Tighten each nut a little at a time in the
order shown. Repeat the process until all
the nuts are tight.

230

Aluminum wheels
2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

After changing wheels
10. Reinstall the wheel ornament.
Put the wheel ornament into position and
then tap it firmly with the side or heel of
your hand to snap it into place.

CAUTION
Take due care in handling the ornament to avoid unexpected personal
injury.

11. Check the air pressure of the replaced tire.
Adjust the air pressure to the specification
designated in Section 8. If the pressure is
lower, drive slowly to the nearest service
station and fill to the correct pressure.
Do not forget to reinstall the tire inflation
valve cap as dirt and moisture could get
into the valve core and possibly cause air
leakage. If the cap is missing, have a new
one put on as soon as possible.

If your vehicle needs to be
towed
(a) Towing with wheel lift type truck
From front

From rear

12. Restow all the tools, jack and flat
tire securely.
As soon after changing wheels as possible, tighten the wheel nuts to the torque
specified in Section 8 with a torque
wrench. Have a technician repair the flat
tire.

(b) Using flat bed truck

CAUTION
Before driving, make sure all the
tools, jack and flat tire are securely
in place in their storage location to
reduce the possibility of personal injury during a collision or sudden
braking.
Two−wheel drive models
2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

231

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

(a) Towing with wheel lift type truck
From front

From rear

If towing is necessary, we recommended you to have it done by your
Toyota dealer or a commercial tow
truck service. In consultation with them,
have your vehicle towed using either (a)
or (b).

TOWING PRECAUTIONS:

Only when you cannot receive a towing
service from a Toyota dealer or commercial tow truck service, tow your vehicle carefully in accordance with the
instructions given in Emergency towing" in this section.

Two−wheel drive models

Proper equipment will help ensure that
your vehicle is not damaged while being
towed. Commercial operators are generally
aware of the state/provincial and local
laws pertaining to towing.
(b) Using flat bed truck

Your vehicle can be damaged if it is
towed incorrectly. Although most operators
know the correct procedure, it is possible
to make a mistake. To avoid damage to
your vehicle, make sure the following precautions are observed. If necessary, show
this page to the tow truck driver.

Four−wheel drive models

232

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

Use a safety chain system for all towing,
and abide by the state/provincial and local
laws. The wheels and axle on the ground
must be in good condition. If they are
damaged, use a towing dolly.
(a) Towing with wheel lift type truck
From front
Use a towing dolly under the rear wheels.

NOTICE
Never tow a vehicle with an automatic
transmission from the front with the
rear wheels on the ground, as this
may cause serious damage to the
transmission.

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

From rearPlace the ignition key in the
ACC" position.

NOTICE
z When lifting wheels, take care to
ensure adequate ground clearance
for towing at the opposite end of
the raised vehicle. Otherwise, the
bumper and/or underbody of the
towed vehicle will be damaged during towing.
z Do not tow with the key removed or
in the LOCK" position, as the
steering lock mechanism is not
strong enough to hold the front
wheels straight while towing.
(b) Using flat bed truck

Four−wheel drive models
(a) Towing with wheel lift type truck

From front
Use a towing dolly under the rear wheels.

NOTICE
Never tow a vehicle with an automatic
transmission from the front with the
rear wheels on the ground, as this
may cause serious damage to the
transmission.
From rearWe recommend using a towing dolly under the front wheels. If you do
not use a towing dolly, place the ignition
key in the ACC" position, put the transmission in N" and the transfer in H"
mode (high speed position, two−wheel
drive).

NOTICE

All models
(c) Towing with sling type truck

NOTICE
Do not tow with sling type truck, either from the front or rear. This may
cause body damage.

Do not tow with the key removed or
in the LOCK" position when towing
from the rear without a towing dolly.
The steering lock mechanism is not
strong enough to hold the front
wheels straight.
(b) Using flat bed truck
2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

233

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

Emergency towing
NOTICE

NOTICE

Only use specified towing hook;
otherwise your vehicle may be damaged.

Use only a cable or chain specifically
intended for use in towing vehicles.
Securely fasten the cable or chain to
the towing hook provided.

A driver must be in the vehicle to steer
it and operate the brakes.

If towing is necessary, we recommend
you to have it done by your Toyota
dealer or a commercial tow truck service.
If towing service is not available in an
emergency, your vehicle may be temporarily towed by a cable or chain secured to the emergency towing hook.
Use extreme caution when towing vehicles.

Towing in this manner may be done only
on hard−surfaced roads for a short distance and at low speeds. Also, the
wheels, axles, drive train, steering and
brakes must all be in good condition.

Before towing, release the parking brake
and put the transmission in N" and the
transfer in H" mode (high speed position,
two−wheel drive). The key must be in
ACC" (engine off) or ON" (engine running).

CAUTION

Use extreme caution when towing vehicles. Avoid sudden starts or erratic
driving maneuvers which would place
excessive stress on the emergency
towing hook and towing cable or
chain. The hook and towing cable or
chain may break and cause serious
injury or damage.

If the engine is not running, the power assist for the brakes and steering
will not work so steering and braking
will be much harder than usual.

Four−wheel drive modelsBefore towing,
remove the towing hook cover in front of
the emergency towing hook. By doing this,
it prevents the towing cable from damaging the bumper. See Removing towing
hook cover for emergency towing" for instructions.

234

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

Removing towing hook
cover for emergency towing
(four−wheel drive models)
1. Use a Phillips−head screwdriver and
remove the clip.
2. Unhook the towing hook cover.

Emergency towing hook
precautions
Before emergency towing, check that
the hook is not broken or damaged and
that the installation bolts are not loose.

Fasten the towing cable or chain securely to the hook.

Do not jerk the hook. Apply steady and
even force.

To avoid damaging the hook, do not

Towing hook
cover

pull from the side or at a vertical
angle. Always pull straight ahead.

Clip
Removing clip

Installing clip

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

235

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

Tips for towing a stuck
vehicle
CAUTION
If the emergency towing hook is used
to get out when your vehicle becomes
struck in mud, sand or other condition from which the vehicle cannot be
driven out under its own power, make
sure to observe the precautions mentioned below. Otherwise, excessive
stress will be put on the hook and
the towing cable or chain may break,
causing serious injury or damage.

If you cannot shift automatic
transmission selector lever
(two−wheel drive models)

The following methods are effective to
get out when your vehicle is struck in
mud, sand or other condition from
which the vehicle cannot be driven out
under its own power. Use extreme caution when towing vehicles. In addition,
keep away from the vehicles and towing
cable or chain when towing.

Remove the soil and sand in the front
and the back of the tires.

Place a stone or wood under the tires.

If the towing vehicle can hardly
If you cannot shift the selector lever
out of P" position to other positions
even though the brake pedal is depressed, use the shift lock override button as follows:

move, do not forcibly continue the
towing. Contact your Toyota dealer
or a commercial tow truck service
for assistance.

Tow the vehicle as straight ahead

1. Turn the ignition key to
position. Make sure the
brake is set.

as possible.

Keep away from the vehicle during
towing.

LOCK"
parking

2. Pry up the cover with a flat−bladed
screwdriver or equivalent.

236

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

If you cannot shift automatic
transmission selector lever
(four−wheel drive models)

3. Insert the screwdriver or equivalent
into the hole to push down the shift
lock override button. You can shift
out of P" position only while pushing the button.

If you cannot shift the selector lever
out of P" position to other positions
even though the brake pedal is depressed, use the shift lock override button as follows:

3. Insert your finger into the hole to
move the shift lock overdrive lever
backward. You can shift out of P"
position only while holding back the
lever.

4. Shift into N" position.

1. Turn the ignition key to
position. Make sure the
brake is set.

4. Shift into N" position.

5. Insert the cover.
6. Start the engine. For your safety,
keep the brake pedal depressed.
Be sure to have the system checked by
your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

LOCK"
parking

2. Pry up the cover with a flat−bladed
screwdriver or equivalent.

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

5. Insert the cover.
6. Start the engine. For your safety,
keep the brake pedal depressed.
Be sure to have the system checked by
your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

237

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

If you lose your keys
Many Toyota dealers can make a new
key if you can give them the key number. If your vehicle is equipped with the
engine immobiliser system, the dealer
will also need your master key.
Vehicles with engine immobiliser system
Even if you lose only one key, contact
your Toyota dealer to make a new key. If
you lose all your master keys, you cannot
make new keys; the whole engine immobiliser system must be replaced.
See the suggestion given in Keys" in
Section 1−2.

If you lose your wireless
remote control transmitter
Please contact your nearest Toyota
dealer and you can purchase a new
wireless remote control transmitter.
Have the registered identification numbers
of your transmitters deleted from your vehicle by your Toyota dealer as soon as
possible to avoid the possibility of theft or
an accident. Then, have the identification
number of your new transmitter registered.
At the same time, you must bring all of
the remaining transmitters to have them
registered again as well.

If your keys are locked in the vehicle and
you cannot get a duplicate, many Toyota
dealers can still open the door for you,
using their special tools. If you must
break a window to get in, we suggest
breaking the smallest side window because it is the least expensive to replace.
Be extremely cautious to avoid cuts from
the glass.

238

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

SECTION

CORROSION PREVENTION AND
APPEARANCE CARE
Protecting your Toyota from corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Washing and waxing your Toyota . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Cleaning the interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

239

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

Protecting your Toyota
from corrosion
Toyota, through its diligent research, design and use of the most advanced
technology available, has done its part to
help prevent corrosion and has provided
you with the finest quality vehicle
construction. Now, it is up to you. Proper
care of your Toyota can help ensure long−
term corrosion prevention.
The most common causes of corrosion
to your vehicle are:

The accumulation of road salt, dirt and
moisture in hard−to−reach areas under
the vehicle.

Chipping

of paint, or undercoating
caused by minor accidents or by
stones and gravel.

Care is especially important if you live
in particular areas or operate your vehicle under certain environmental conditions:

Road salt or dust control chemicals will
accelerate corrosion, as will the presence of salt in the air near the sea−
coast or in areas of industrial pollution.

High humidity accelerates corrosion especially when temperatures range just
above the freezing point.

240

Wetness or dampness to certain parts

High pressure water or steam is effec-

of your vehicle for an extended period
of time, may cause corrosion even
though other parts of the vehicle may
be dry.

tive for cleaning the vehicle’s underside
and wheel housings. Pay particular
attention to these areas as it is difficult
to see all the mud and dirt. It will do
more harm than good to simply wet the
mud and debris without removing them.
The lower edge of doors, rocker panels
and frame members have drain holes
which should not be allowed to clog
with dirt as trapped water in these
areas can cause corrosion.

High ambient temperatures can cause
corrosion to those components of the
vehicle which are prevented from
quick−drying due to lack of proper ventilation.
The above signifies the necessity to keep
your vehicle, particularly the underside, as
clean as possible and to repair any damage to paint or protective coatings as
soon as possible.
To help prevent corrosion on
Toyota, follow these guidelines:

your

Wash your vehicle frequently. It is, of
course, necessary to keep your vehicle
clean by regular washing, but to prevent
corrosion, the following points should be
observed:

If you drive on salted roads in the
winter or if you live near the ocean,
you should hose off the undercarriage
at least once a month to minimize corrosion.

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

Wash the underside of the vehicle thoroughly when winter is over.
See Washing and waxing your Toyota" for
more tips.
Check the condition of your vehicle’s
paint and trim. If you find any chips or
scratches in the paint, touch them up immediately to prevent corrosion from starting. If the chips or scratches have gone
through the bare metal, have a qualified
body shop make the repair.

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

Washing and waxing your
Toyota
Check the interior of your vehicle. Water and dirt can accumulate under the
floor mats and could cause corrosion. Occasionally check under the mats to make
sure the area is dry. Be particularly careful when transporting chemicals, cleansers, fertilizers, salt, etc; these should be
transported in proper containers. If a spill
or leak should occur, immediately clean
and dry the area.
Use mud shields on your wheels. If you
drive on salted or gravel roads, mud
shields help protect your vehicle. Full−size
shields, which come as near to the ground
as possible, are the best. We recommend
that the fittings and the area where the
shields are installed be treated to resist
corrosion. Your Toyota dealer will be
happy to assist in supplying and installing
the shields if they are recommended for
your area.
Keep your vehicle in a well ventilated
garage or a roofed place. Do not park
your vehicle in a damp, poorly ventilated garage. If you wash your vehicle in
the garage, or if you drive it in covered
with water or snow, your garage may be
so damp it will cause corrosion. Even if
your garage is heated, a wet vehicle can
corrode if the ventilation is poor.

Washing your Toyota
Keep your
washing.

vehicle

clean

regular

The following cases may cause weakness
to the paint or corrosion to the body and
parts. Wash your vehicle as soon as possible.

When driving in a coastal area
When driving on a road sprinkled with
antifreeze

When having coal tar, tree sap, bird
droppings and carcass of an insect

When driving in the areas where there
is a lot of smoke, soot, dust, iron dust
and chemical substance

When the vehicle becomes remarkably
dirty with dust and mud
Hand−washing your Toyota
Work in the shade and wait until the
vehicle body is not hot to the touch.

1. Rinse off loose dirt with a hose. Remove any mud or road salt from the
underside of the vehicle or in the
wheel wells.
2. Wash with a mild car−wash soap,
mixed according to the manufacturer’s
instructions. Use a soft cotton mitt and
keep it wet by dipping it frequently into
the wash water. Do not rub hardlet
the soap and water remove the dirt.
Plastic wheel ornaments: The plastic
wheel ornaments are damaged easily by
organic substances. If any organic substances splashes an ornament, be sure to
wash it off with water and check if the
ornament is damaged.

CAUTION
Do not attach the heavily damaged
plastic wheel ornament. It may fly off
the wheel and cause accidents while
the vehicle is moving.

CAUTION
When cleaning under floor or chassis,
be careful not to injure your hands.

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

Aluminum wheels: Use only a mild soap
or neutral detergent.
Road tar: Remove with turpentine or
cleaners that are marked safe for painted
surfaces.

241

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

Cleaning the interior
NOTICE

NOTICE

Do not use organic substances (gasoline, kerosene, benzine or strong solvents), which may be toxic or cause
damage.

To prevent damage to the antenna,
make sure it is retracted before driving your Toyota through an automatic
car wash. On models with detachable
antenna, remove the antenna before
using an automatic car wash.

3. Rinse
thoroughlydried
soap
can
cause streaking. In hot weather you
may need to rinse each section right
after you wash it.
4. To prevent water spots, dry the vehicle
using a clean soft cotton towel. Do not
rub or press hardyou might scratch
the paint.
Automatic car wash
Your vehicle may be washed in an automatic car wash, but remember that the
paint can be scratched by some type of
brushes, unfiltered washing water, or the
washing process itself. Scratching reduces
paint durability and gloss, especially on
darker colors. The manager of the car
wash should be able to advise you whether the process is safe for the paint on
your vehicle.

242

Waxing your Toyota
Polishing and waxing is recommended
to maintain the original beauty of your
Toyota’s finish.
Once a month or if the vehicle surface
does not repel water well, apply wax.
1. Always wash and dry the vehicle before you begin waxing, even if you are
using a combined cleaner and wax.
2. Use a good quality polish and wax. If
the finish has become extremely weathered, use a car−cleaning polish, followed by a separate wax. Carefully follow the manufacturer’s instructions and
precautions. Be sure to polish and wax
the chrome trim as well as the paint.
3. Wax the vehicle again when water
does not bead but remains on the surface in large patches.

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

CAUTION
Do not wash the vehicle floor with
water, or allow water to get onto the
floor when cleaning the vehicle interior or exterior. Water may get into
audio components or other electrical
components above or under the floor
carpet (or mat) and cause a malfunction; and it may cause body corrosion.
Vinyl interior
The vinyl upholstery may be easily
cleaned with a mild soap or detergent
and water.
First vacuum over the upholstery to remove loose dirt. Then, using a sponge or
soft cloth, apply the soap solution to the
vinyl. After allowing it to soak in for a few
minutes to loosen the dirt, remove the dirt
and wipe off the soap with a clean damp
cloth. If all the dirt does not come off,
repeat the procedure. Commercial foaming−type vinyl cleaners are also available
which work well. Follow the manufacturer’s
instructions.

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

NOTICE

z Do not use dye or bleach on the
beltsit may weaken them.

z Do not use organic substances (solvents, kerosene, alcohol, gasoline,
etc.) or alkaline or acidic solutions.
These chemicals can cause discoloring, staining or peeling of the
surface.

NOTICE
Do not use solvent, thinner, gasoline
or window cleaner on the interior.

z Do not use the belts until they become dry.

Carpets
Use a good foam−type
clean the carpets.

shampoo

Begin by vacuuming thoroughly to remove
as much dirt as possible. Several types of
foam cleaners are available; some are in
aerosol cans and others are powders or
liquids which you mix with water to produce a foam. To shampoo the carpets,
use a sponge or brush to apply the foam.
Rub in overlapping circles.
Do not apply waterthe best results are
obtained by keeping the carpet as dry as
possible. Read the shampoo instructions
and follow them closely.
Seat belts
The seat belts may be cleaned with
mild soap and water or with lukewarm
water.

Windows
The windows may be cleaned with any
household window cleaner.

NOTICE
When cleaning the inside of the rear
window, be careful not to scratch or
damage the heater wires or connectors.
Air conditioning control panel, car audio, instrument panel, console panel,
and switches
Use a soft damp cloth for cleaning.
Soak a clean soft cloth in water or lukewarm water then lightly wipe off dirt.

Use a cloth or sponge. As you are cleaning, check the belts for excessive wear,
fraying, or cuts.

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

z If you use cleaners or polishing
agents, make sure their ingredients
do not include the substances mentioned above.
z If you use a liquid car freshener, do
not apill the liquid onto the vehicle’s interior surfaces. It may contain
the
ingredients mentioned
above. Immediately clean any spill
using the method mentioned above.
Leather Interior
The leather upholstery may be cleaned
with neutral detergent for wool.
Remove dirt using a soft cloth dampened
with 5% solution of neutral detergent for
wool. Then thoroughly wipe off all traces
of detergent with a clean damp cloth.

243

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

After cleaning or whenever any part of the
leather gets wet, dry with a soft clean
cloth. Allow the leather to dry in a ventilated shaded area.

NOTICE
z If a stain should fail to come out
with a neutral detergent, apply a
cleaner that does not contain an
organic solvent.
z Never use organic substances such
as benzine, alcohol or gasoline, or
alkaline or acid solutions for cleaning the leather as these could
cause discoloring.

z The interior of your vehicle is apt
to heat up on hot summer days, so
avoid placing on the upholstery
items made of vinyl or plastic or
containing wax as these tend to
stick to leather when warm.
z Improper cleaning of the leather upholstery could result in discoloration or staining.
If you have any questions about the
cleaning of your Toyota, your local
Toyota dealer will be pleased to answer
them.

z Use of a nylon brush or synthetic
fiber cloth, etc. may scratch the
fine grained surface of the leather.
z Mildew may develop on soiled leather upholstery. Be especially careful
to avoid oil spots. Try to keep your
upholstery always clean.
z Long exposure to direct sunlight
may cause the leather surface to
harden and shrink. Keep your vehicle in a shaded area, especially in
the summer.

244

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

SECTION

VEHICLE MAINTENANCE AND CARE
Maintenance requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Does your vehicle need repairing? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249

For scheduled maintenance information, please refer to the Scheduled Maintenance Guide" or Owner’s Manual Supplement".

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

245

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

Maintenance requirements
Your Toyota vehicle has been designed for
fewer maintenance requirements with longer service intervals to save both your time
and money. However, each regular maintenance, as well as day−to−day care, is
more important than ever before to ensure
smooth, and trouble−free, safe, and economical drivings.
It is the owner’s responsibility to make
sure the specified maintenance, including
general maintenance service, is performed.
Note that both the new vehicle and emission control system warranties specify that
proper maintenance and care must be performed. See Owner’s Warranty Information Booklet" or Owner’s Manual Supplement" for complete warranty information.
General maintenance
General maintenance items are those day−
to−day care practices that are important to
your vehicle for proper operation. It is the
owner’s responsibility to ensure that the
general maintenance items are performed
regularly.
These checks or inspections can be done
either by yourself or a qualified technician,
or if you prefer, your Toyota dealer will be
pleased to do them at a nominal cost.

246

Scheduled maintenance

Where to go for service?

The scheduled maintenance items listed in
the Scheduled Maintenance Guide" or
Owner’s Manual Supplement" are those
required to be serviced at regular intervals.

Toyota technicians are well−trained specialists and are kept up to date with the
latest service information through technical
bulletins, service tips, and in−dealership
training programs. They learn to work on
Toyotas before they work on your vehicle,
rather than while they are working on it.

For details of your maintenance schedule,
read the Scheduled Maintenance Guide"
or Owner’s Manual Supplement".
It is recommended that any replacement
parts used for maintenance or for the
repair of the emission control system
be Toyota supplied.

You can be confident that your Toyota
dealer’s service department performs the
best job to meet the maintenance requirements on your vehiclereliably and economically.

The owner may elect to use non−Toyota
supplied parts for replacement purposes without invalidating the emission
control system warranty. However, use
of replacement parts which are not of
equivalent quality may impair the effectiveness of the emission control systems.

Your copy of the repair order is proof that
all required maintenance has been performed for warranty coverage. And if any
problems should arise with your vehicle
while under warranty, your Toyota dealer
will promptly take care of it. Again, be
sure to keep a copy of the repair order
for any service performed on your Toyota.

You may also elect to have maintenance, replacement, or repair of the
emission control devices and system
performed by any automotive repair establishment or individual without invalidating this warranty. See Owner’s Warranty Information Booklet" or Owner’s
Manual Supplement" for complete warranty information.

What about do−it−yourself maintenance?

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

Many of the maintenance items are easy
to do yourself if you have a little mechanical ability and a few basic automotive
tools. Simple instructions for how to perform them are presented in Section 7.

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

General maintenance
If you are a skilled do−it−yourself mechanic, the Toyota service manuals are recommended. Please be aware that do−it−yourself maintenance can affect your warranty
coverage. See Owner’s Warranty Information Booklet" or Owner’s Manual Supplement" for the details.

Listed below are the general maintenance
items that should be performed as frequently as specified. In addition to checking the items listed, if you notice any
unusual noise, smell or vibration, you
should investigate the cause or take your
vehicle to your Toyota dealer or a qualified service shop immediately. It is recommended that any problem you notice be
brought to the attention of your dealer or
the qualified service shop for their advice.

CAUTION
Make these checks only where adequate ventilation can be obtained if
you run the engine.
OUTSIDE THE VEHICLE
Items listed below should be performed
from time to time, unless otherwise
specified.
Tire pressure
Check the pressure with a gauge every
two weeks, or at least once a month. See
Section 7−2 for additional information.

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

Tire surface and wheel nuts
Check the tires carefully for cuts, damage
or excessive wear. See Section 7−2 for
additional information. When checking the
tires, make sure no nuts are missing, and
check the nuts for looseness. Tighten
them if necessary.
Tire rotation
Rotate the tires according to the maintenance schedule. (For scheduled maintenance information, please refer to the separate Scheduled Maintenance Guide" or
Owner’s Manual Supplement".). See Section 7−2 for additional information.
Fluid leaks
Check underneath for leaking fuel, oil, water or other fluid after the vehicle has
been parked for a while. If you smell fuel
fumes or notice any leak, have the cause
found and corrected immediately.
Doors and engine hood
Check that all doors including back door
operate smoothly and all latches lock securely. Make sure the engine hood secondary latch secures the hood from opening when the primary latch is released.

247

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

INSIDE THE VEHICLE

Seat belts

Items listed below should be checked
regularly, e.g. while performing periodic
services, cleaning the vehicle, etc.

Check that the seat belt system such as
buckles, retractors and anchors operate
properly and smoothly. Make sure the belt
webbing is not cut, frayed, worn or damaged.

Lights
Make sure the headlights, stop lights, tail
lights, turn signal lights, and other lights
are all working. Check headlight aim.
Service reminder indicators and warning
buzzers
Check that all service reminder indicators
and warning buzzers function properly.
Steering wheel

Accelerator pedal
Check the pedal for smooth operation and
uneven pedal effort or catching.
Brake pedal
Check the pedal for smooth operation and
that the pedal has the proper clearance.
Check the brake booster function.

Check that it has the specified free play.
Be alert for changes in steering condition,
such as hard steering or strange noise.

Brakes

Seats

Parking brake

Check that all seat controls such as seat
adjusters, seatback recliner, etc. operate
smoothly and that all latches lock securely
in any position. Check that the head restraint move up and down smoothly and
that the locks hold securely in any latched
position. For folding−down rear seatbacks
and swing−up rear seat cushions, check
that the latches lock securely.

Check that the lever has the proper travel
and that, on a safe incline, your vehicle
is held securely with only the parking
brake applied.

248

At a safe place, check that the brakes do
not pull to one side when applied.

Automatic transmission Park" mechanism
Check the lock release button of the selector lever for proper and smooth operation. On a safe incline, check that your
vehicle is held securely with the selector
lever in P" position and all brakes released.
IN THE ENGINE COMPARTMENT
Items listed below should be checked
from time to time, e.g. each time when
refueling.
Washer fluid
Make sure there is sufficient fluid in the
tank. See Section 7−3 for additional information.
Engine coolant level
Make sure the
the F" and L"
reservoir when
Section 7−2 for

coolant level is between
lines on the see−through
the engine is cold. See
additional information.

Battery electrolyte level
Your Toyota has a maintenance free battery. You do not have to add distilled water. See Section 7−3 for additional information.

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

Does your vehicle need
repairing?
Brake fluid level
Make sure the brake fluid level is correct.
See Section 7−2 for additional information.
Engine oil level
Check the level on the dipstick with the
engine turned off and the vehicle parked
on a level spot. See Section 7−2 for additional information.
Power steering fluid level
Check the level through the reservoir. The
level should be in the HOT" or COLD"
range depending on the fluid temperature.
See Section 7−2 for additional information.
Exhaust system
If you notice any change in the sound of
the exhaust or smell exhaust fumes, have
the cause located and corrected immediately. (See engine exhaust cautions in
Section 2.)

Be on the alert for changes in performance, sounds, and visual tip−offs that
indicate service is needed. Some important clues are as follows:

Engine missing, stumbling, or pinging
Appreciable loss of power
Strange engine noises
A leak under the vehicle (however, water dripping from the air conditioning
after use is normal.)

If you notice any of these clues, take your
vehicle to your Toyota dealer as soon as
possible. It probably needs adjustment or
repair.

CAUTION
Do not continue driving with the vehicle unchecked. It could result in serious vehicle damage and possibly
personal injury.

Change in exhaust sound (This may
indicate a dangerous carbon monoxide
leak. Drive with the windows open and
have the exhaust system checked immediately.)

Flat−looking tire; excessive tire squeal
when cornering; uneven tire wear

Vehicle pulls to one side when driving
straight on a level road

Strange noises related to suspension
movement

Loss of brake effectiveness; spongy
feeling brake or clutch pedal; pedal almost touches floor; vehicle pulls to one
side when braking

Engine coolant temperature continually
higher than normal
2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

249

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

250

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

SECTION

7− 1

DO−IT−YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
Introduction
Engine compartment overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuse locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Do−it−yourself service precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parts and tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

252
253
253
255

251

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

Engine compartment overview
1. Windshield and back window
washer fluid tank
2. Power steering fluid reservoir
3. Engine oil filler cap
4. Brake fluid reservoir
5. Fuse block
6. Battery
7. Engine coolant reservoir
8. Engine oil level dipstick

252

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

Do−it−yourself service
precautions

Fuse locations

If you perform maintenance by yourself,
be sure to follow the correct procedure
given in this section.
Spare fuses

You should be aware that improper or incomplete servicing may result in operating
problems.
Performing
do−it−yourself
maintenance
during the warranty period may affect your
warranty coverage. Read the separate
Toyota Warranty statement for details and
suggestions.
This section gives instructions only for
those items that are relatively easy for an
owner to perform. As explained in Section
6, there are still a number of items that
must be done by a qualified technician
with special tools.
For information on tools and parts for do−
it−yourself maintenance, see Parts and
tools".
Utmost care
ing on your
injury. Here
you should
serve:

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

should be taken when workvehicle to prevent accidental
are a few precautions that
be especially careful to ob-

253

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

CAUTION

When the engine is running, keep
hands, clothing, and tools away
from the moving fan and engine
drive
belts.
(Removing
rings,
watches, and ties is advisable.)

Right

after driving, the engine
compartmentthe engine, radiator,
exhaust manifold, power steering
fluid reservoir and spark plug
boots, etc.will be hot. So be careful not to touch them. Oil, fluids
and spark plugs may also be hot.

If the engine is hot, do not remove
the radiator cap or loosen the drain
plugs to prevent burning yourself.

Do not smoke, cause sparks or allow open flames around fuel or the
battery. Their fumes are flammable.

Be extremely cautious when working on the battery. It contains poisonous and corrosive sulfuric acid.

Use eye protection whenever you
work on or under your vehicle
where you may be exposed to flying
or falling material, fluid spray, etc.

Used engine oil contains potentially

z Remember that battery and ignition
cables carry high currents or voltages. Be careful of accidentally
causing a short circuit.

harmful contaminants which may
cause skin disorders such as inflammation or skin cancer, so care
should be taken to avoid prolonged
and repeated contact with it. To remove used engine oil from your
skin, wash thoroughly with soap
and water.

z Add only demineralized or distilled
water to fill the radiator. And if you
spill some of the coolant, be sure
to wash it off with water to prevent
it from damaging the parts or paint.

Do not leave used oil within the

z Do not pry the outer electrode of a
spark plug against the center electrode.

reach of children.

Dispose of used oil and filter only
in a safe and acceptable manner.
Do not dispose of used oil and filter in household trash, in sewers or
onto the ground. Call your dealer or
a service station for information
concerning recycling or disposal.

Do not get under your vehicle with
just the body jack supporting it. Always use automotive jack stands or
other solid supports.

254

NOTICE

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

z Do not allow dirt or anything else
to fall through the spark plug holes.

z Use only spark plugs of the specified type. Using other types will
cause engine damage, loss of performance or radio noise.
z Do not overfill automatic transmission fluid, or the transmission
could be damaged.

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

Parts and tools
z Do not drive with the air cleaner
filter removed, or excessive engine
wear could result. Also backfiring
could cause a fire in the engine
compartment.
z Be careful not to scratch the glass
surface with the wiper frame.
z When closing the engine hood,
check to see that you have not forgotten any tools, rags, etc.

Here is a list of parts and tools you will
need on performing do−it−yourself maintenance. Remember all Toyota parts are designed in metric sizes, so your tools must
be metric.

Checking power steering fluid

Checking the engine oil level

Parts (if level is low):

Automatic

Tools:

Rag or paper towel
Funnel (only for adding fluid)

transmission
DEXRONII or III

Engine

oil
API
grade
SJ,
Energy−Conserving"
or
ILSAC
multigrade having viscosity proper for
your climate

Tools:

Rag or paper towel
Funnel (only for adding oil)
Checking the engine coolant level
Parts (if level is low):

TOYOTA Long Life Coolant" or equivalent
See Section 7−2 for details about coolant type selection.

fluid

Tools:

Rag or paper towel
Funnel (only for adding fluid)
Checking battery condition
Tools:

Warm water
Baking soda
Grease
Conventional
clamp bolts)

wrench

(for

terminal

Checking and replacing fuses

Demineralized or distilled water

Parts (if replacement is necessary):

Tools:

Fuse with same amperage rating as

Funnel (only for adding coolant)
Checking brake fluid
Parts (if level is low):

SAE J1703 or FMVSS No.116 DOT 3

original
Tools:

Conventional wrench (for instrument
lower panel nut)

brake fluid
2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

255

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

Adding washer fluid
Parts:

Water
Washer fluid containing antifreeze
(for winter use)
Tools:

Funnel
Replacing light bulbs
Parts:

Bulb with same number and wattage
rating as original (See charts in Replacing light bulbs" in Section 7−3.)
Tools:

Screwdriver

256

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

SECTION

7− 2

DO−IT−YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
Engine and Chassis
Checking the engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Checking the engine coolant level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Checking brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Checking power steering fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Checking tire pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Checking and replacing tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Rotating tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Installing snow tires and chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Replacing wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Aluminum wheel precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

Checking the engine oil level

Low level

Add oil

O.K.

Full level

Too full

If the oil level is below or only slightly
above the low level, add engine oil of
the same type as already in the engine.

ENGINE OIL SELECTION

Remove the oil filler cap and add engine
oil in small quantities at a time, checking
the dipstick.

Recommended viscosity (SAE):

The approximate quantity of oil needed to
fill between the low level and the full level
on the dipstick is indicated below for reference.

Use API grade SJ, Energy−Conserving"
or ILSAC multigrade engine oil.

5W-30 Preferred

When the level reaches within the correct
range, install the filler cap hand−tight.
With the engine at operating temperature and turned off, check the oil level
on the dipstick.
1. To get a true reading, the vehicle
should be on a level spot. After turning
off the engine, wait a few minutes for
the oil to drain back into the bottom of
the engine.

Oil quantity, L (qt., lmp. qt.):
1.2(1.3,1.1)

Temperature range anticipated before
next oil change

NOTICE
z Avoid overfilling, or
could be damaged.

the

z Check the oil level on the dipstick
once again after adding the oil.

SAE 5W−30 is the best choice for your
vehicle, for good fuel economy and
good starting in cold weather.
If you use SAE 10W−30 engine oil in
extremely low temperatures, the engine
may become difficult to start, so SAE
5W−30 engine oil is recommended.

2. Pull out the dipstick, and wipe it clean
with a rag.
3. Reinsert the dipstickpush it in as far
as it will go, or the reading will not be
correct.
4. Pull the dipstick out and look at the oil
level on the end.

engine

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

Checking the engine coolant
level
Oil identification marks
Either or both API registered marks are
added to some oil containers to help
you select the oil you should use.
The API Service Symbol is located anywhere on the outside of the container.

API service symbol

The top portion of the label shows the oil
quality by API (American Petroleum Institute) designations such as SJ. The center
portion of the label shows the SAE viscosity grade such as SAE 5W−30. Energy−
Conserving" shown in the lower portion,
indicates that the oil has fuel−saving capabilities.
The ILSAC (International Lubricant Standardization and Approval Committee) Certification Mark is displayed on the front of
the container.

Look at the see−through coolant reservoir when the engine is cold. The coolant level is satisfactory if it is between
the F" and L" lines on the reservoir.
If the level is low, add ethylene−glycol
type coolant for a proper corrosion
protection of aluminum components.
The coolant level in the reservoir will vary
with engine temperature. However, if the
level is on or below the L" line, add
coolant. Bring the level up to the F" line.
Always use ethylene−glycol type coolant
for a proper corrosion protection of aluminum components. See information in the
next column.
If the coolant level drops within a short
time after replenishing, there may be a
leak in the system. Visually check the
radiator, hoses, radiator cap and drain
cock and water pump.
If you can find no leak, have your Toyota
dealer test the cap pressure and check
for leaks in the cooling system.

ILSAC certification mark
2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

Checking brake fluid
CAUTION
To prevent burning yourself, do not
remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot.
Coolant type selection
Use of improper coolants may damage
your engine cooling system. Your coolant
must contain ethylene−glycol type coolant
for a proper corrosion protection of your
engine
that
contains
aluminum
components. Use TOYOTA Long Life
Coolant" or equivalent.

We recommend to use 50% solution for
your Toyota, to provide protection down to
about −35C (−31F). When it is extremely cold, to provide protection down to
about −50C (−58F), 60% solution is recommended. Do not use more than 70%
solution for better coolant performance.

NOTICE
Do not use alcohol type antifreeze or
plain water alone.

To check the fluid level, simply look at
the see−through reservoir. The level
should be between the MAX" and
MIN" lines on the reservoir.

In addition to preventing freezing and
subsequent damage to the engine, this
type of coolant will also prevent corrosion.
Further supplemental inhibitors or additives
are neither needed nor recommended.

It is normal for the brake fluid level to go
down slightly as the brake pads wear or
when the fluid level in the accumulator is
high.

Read the coolant container for information
on freeze protection. Follow the manufacturer’s directions for how much to mix
with plain water (preferably demineralized
water or distilled water). The total capacity
of the cooling system is given in Section
8.

If the reservoir needs frequent refilling, it
may indicate a serious mechanical problem.
If the level is low, add SAE J1703 or
FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 brake fluid to the
brake reservoir.

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

Checking power steering fluid
Refilling brake fluid:
1. Turn the ignition switch off.
2. Depress the brake pedal more than 40
times.
3. Remove the reservoir cover by hand.
Add brake fluid up to the MAX" line.

NOTICE

If cold add

If you spill the fluid, be sure to wash
it off with water to prevent it from
damaging the parts or paint.

If cold O.K.

If you do not follow the procedure above,
the reservoir may overflow.
Use only newly opened brake fluid. Once
opened, brake fluid absorbs moisture from
the air, and excess moisture can cause a
dangerous loss of braking.

If hot add
If hot O.K.

Check the fluid level on the dipstick. If
necessary, add automatic transmission
fluid DEXRONII or III.

CAUTION
Take care when filling the reservoir
because brake fluid can harm your
eyes and damage painted surfaces. If
fluid gets in your eyes, flush your
eyes with clean water immediately. If
you still feel uncomfortable with your
eyes, go to the doctor.

If the vehicle has been driven around 80
km/h (50 mph) for 20 minutes (a little
more in frigid temperatures), the fluid is
hot (60C80C or 140F175F). You
may also check the level when the fluid
is
cold
(about
room
temperature,
10C30C or 50F85F) if the engine
has not been run for about five hours.
a. Clean all dirt from outside of the reservoir tank.
b. Remove the reservoir cap by turning it
counterclockwise and wipe the dipstick
clean.
2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

Checking tire pressure
c. Reinstall the reservoir cap.

Incorrect tire pressure can reduce tire
life and make your vehicle less safe to
drive.

d. Remove the reservoir cap again and
look at the fluid level. If the fluid is cold,
the level should be in the COLD" range
on the dipstick. Similarly, if it is hot, the
fluid level should be in the HOT" range.
If the level is at the low side of either
range, add automatic transmission fluid
DEXRONII or III to bring the level within
the range.
e. After replacing the reservoir cap, visually check the steering box case, vane
pump and hose connections for leaks or
damage.

CAUTION
The reservoir tank may be hot so be
careful not to burn yourself.

NOTICE
Avoid overfilling, or the power steering could be damaged.

Low tire pressure results in excessive
wear, poor handling, reduced fuel economy, and the possibility of blowouts from
overheated tires. Also, low tire pressure
can cause poor sealing of the tire bead.
If the tire pressure is excessively low,
there is the possibility of wheel deformation and/or tire separation.

Keep your tire pressures at the proper
level.
The recommended cold tire pressures,
size and the vehicle capacity weight
given in Section 8. The recommended
pressures and tire size are also on
tire pressure label as shown.

tire
are
tire
the

You should check the tire pressures every
two weeks, or at least once a month. And
do not forget the spare!

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

High tire pressure produces a harsh ride,
handling problems, excessive wear at the
center of the tire tread, and a greater
possibility of tire damage from road hazards.
If a tire frequently needs refilling, have it
checked by your Toyota dealer.

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

Checking and replacing tires
The following instructions for checking
tire pressure should be observed:

Tread wear indicator

The pressure should be checked only
when the tires are cold. If your vehicle has been packed for at least 3
hours and has not been driven for
more than 1.5 km or 1 mile since, you
will get an accurate cold tire pressure
reading.

Even if the damage does not appear serious, a qualified technician should examine
the damage. Objects which have penetrated the tire may have caused internal
damage.

Always use a tire pressure gauge.
The appearance of a tire can be misleading. Besides, tire pressures that
are even just a few pounds off can
degrade ride and handling.

Do not bleed or reduce tire pressure
after driving. It is normal for the tire
pressure to be higher after driving.

Never exceed the vehicle capacity
weight. The passenger and luggage
weight should be located so that the
vehicle is balanced.

Be sure to reinstall the tire inflation
valve caps. Without the valve caps,
dirt or moisture could get into the valve
core and cause air leakage. If the caps
have been lost, have new ones put on
as soon as possible.

Check the tires regularly for damage
such as cuts, splits and cracks. If any
damage is found, consult with a technician and have the tire repaired or replaced.

Any tires which are over 6 years old
must be checked by a qualified technician even if damage is not obvious.
CHECKING YOUR TIRES
Check the tire tread for the tread wear
indicators. If the indicators show, replace the tires.
The tires on your Toyota have built−in
tread wear indicators to help you know
when the tires need replacement. When
the tread depth wears to 1.6 mm (0.06
in.) or less, the indicators will appear. If
you can see the indicators in two or more
adjacent grooves, the tire should be replaced. The lower the tread, the higher
the risk of skidding.
The effectiveness of snow tires is lost
if the tread wears down below 4 mm
(0.16 in.).
2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

Tires deteriorate with age even if they
have never or seldom been used.
This also applies to the spare tire and
tires stored for future use.
REPLACING YOUR TIRES
When replacing a tire, use only the
same size and construction as originally installed and with the same or greater load capacity.
Using any other size or type of tire may
seriously affect handling, ride, speedometer/odometer calibration, ground clearance,
and clearance between the body and tires
or snow chains.

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

Rotating tires
CAUTION

Do not mix radial, bias belted, or

When replacing a tubeless tire, the air
valve should also be replaced with a
new one.

bias−ply tires on your vehicle. It
can cause dangerous handling characteristics, resulting in loss of control.

Do not use tires or wheels other
than
the
manufacture’s
mended size.

recom-

Do not use tires of different brands,
sizes and constructions. This may
damage the drive system and prevent the vehicle skid control system
from functioning correctly.

To equalize the wear and help extend
tire life, Toyota recommends that you
rotate your tires according to the maintenance schedule. (For scheduled maintenance information, please refer to the
Scheduled Maintenance Guide" or
Owner’s Manual Supplement".) However, the most appropriate timing for tire
rotation may vary according to your
driving habits and road surface conditions.

Toyota recommends all four tires, or at
least both front or rear tires be replaced as a set.
See If you have a flat tire" in Section 4
for tire change procedure.
When a tire is replaced, the wheel
should always be balanced.

See If you have a flat tire" in Section 4
for tire change procedure.

An unbalanced wheel may affect vehicle
handling and tire life. Wheels can get out
of balance with regular use and should
therefore be balanced occasionally.

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

Installing snow tires and
chains
When rotating tires, check for uneven
wear and damage. Abnormal wear is usually caused by incorrect tire pressure, improper wheel alignment, out−of−balance
wheels, or severe braking.

WHEN TO
CHAINS

USE

SNOW

TIRES

CAUTION

Snow tires or chains are recommended
when driving on snow or ice.

Do not drive with the snow tires

On wet or dry roads, conventional tires
provide better traction than snow tires.

Never drive over 120 km/h (75 mph)

incorrectly inflated.
with any type of snow tires.

SNOW TIRE SELECTION
If you need snow tires, select the same
size, construction and load capacity as
the original tires on your Toyota.
Do not use tires other than those mentioned above. Do not install studded tires
without first checking local regulations for
possible restrictions.
SNOW TIRE INSTALLATION
Snow tires should be installed on all
wheels.
Installing snow tires on the front wheels
only can lead to an excessive difference
in road grip capability between the front
and rear tires which could cause loss of
vehicle control.
When storing removed tires, you should
store them in a cool dry place.
Mark the direction of rotation and be sure
to install them in the same direction when
replacing.
2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

TIRE CHAIN SELECTION
Use the tire chains of correct size.
Regulations regarding the use of tire
chains vary according to location or
type of road, so always check them
before installing chains.
CHAIN INSTALLATION
Install the chains on the rear tires as
tightly as possible. Do not use tire
chains on the front tires. Retighten
chains
after
driving
0.51.0
km
(1/41/2 mile).
When installing chains on your tires, carefully follow the instructions of the chain
manufacturer.
If wheel covers are used, they will be
scratched by the chain band, so remove
the covers before putting on the chains.

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

Replacing wheels
CAUTION

Do not exceed 50 km/h (30 mph) or
the chain manufacturer’s recommended speed limit, whichever is
lower.

Drive

carefully avoiding bumps,
holes, and sharp turns, which may
cause the vehicle to bounce.

Avoid sharp turns or locked−wheel
braking, as use of chains may adversely affect vehicle handling.

When driving with chains installed,
be sure to drive carefully. Slow
down before entering the curves to
avoid losing control of the vehicle.
Otherwise an accident may occur.

WHEN TO REPLACE YOUR WHEELS
If you have wheel damage such as
bending, cracks or heavy corrosion, the
wheel should be replaced.
If you fail to replace damaged wheels, the
tire may slip off the wheel or cause loss
of handling control.
WHEEL SELECTION
When replacing wheels, care should be
taken to ensure that the wheels are replaced by ones with the same load capacity, diameter, rim width, and offset.
Correct replacement wheels are available
at your Toyota dealer.
A wheel of a different size or type may
adversely affect handling, wheel and bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer/odometer calibration, stopping ability, headlight
aim, bumper height, vehicle ground clearance, and tire or snow chain clearance to
the body and chassis.

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

Replacement with used wheels is not recommended as they may have been subjected to rough treatment or high mileage
and could fail without warning. Also, bent
wheels which have been straightened may
have structural damage and therefore
should not be used. Never use an inner
tube in a leaking wheel which is designed
for a tubeless tire.

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

Aluminum wheel precautions
When installing aluminum wheels,
check that the wheel nuts are tight
after driving your vehicle the first 1600
km (1000 miles).

you have
changed your
wheel nuts are
1600 km (1000

rotated, repaired or
tires, check that the
still tight after driving
miles).

When using tire chains, be careful not
to damage the aluminum wheels.

Use only the Toyota wheel nuts and
wrench designed for
wheels.

your

aluminum

When balancing your wheels, use only
Toyota balance weights or equivalent
and a plastic or rubber hammer.

As with any wheel, periodically check
your aluminum wheels for damage. If
damaged, replace immediately.

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

SECTION

7− 3

DO−IT−YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
Electrical components
Checking battery condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Battery recharging precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking and replacing fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing light bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

258
259
260
261
262

257

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

Checking battery condition
Precautions
CAUTION
BATTERY PRECAUTIONS
The battery produces flammable and
explosive hydrogen gas.

Do not cause a spark from the battery with tools.

Do not smoke or light a match near
the battery.
The electrolyte contains poisonous
and corrosive sulfuric acid.

Avoid contact with eyes, skin or
clothes.

Never ingest electrolyte.
Wear protective safety glasses when

Checking battery exterior
If electrolyte gets on your skin,

Ground
cable

If electrolyte gets on your clothes,
there is a
through to
ly take off
follow the
essary.

possibility of its soaking
your skin, so immediatethe exposed clothing and
procedure above, if nec-

If you accidentally swallow electrolyte, drink a large quantity of water
or milk. Follow with milk of magnesia, beaten raw egg or vegetable
oil. Then go immediately for emergency help.

Hold−down
clamp

Check the battery for corroded or loose
terminal connections, cracks, or loose
hold−down clamp.
a. If the battery is corroded, wash it off
with a solution of warm water and baking soda. Coat the outside of the terminals with grease to prevent further corrosion.

working near the battery.

Keep children away from the battery.
EMERGENCY MEASURES

b. If the terminal connections are loose,
tighten their clamp nutsbut do not
overtighten.

If electrolyte gets in your eyes,
flush your eyes with clean water
immediately and get immediate
medical attention. If possible, continue to apply water with a sponge
or cloth while en route to the medical office.

258

Terminals

thoroughly wash the contact area. If
you feel pain or burning, get medical attention immediately.

c. Tighten the hold−down clamp only
enough to keep the battery firmly in
place. Overtightening may damage the
battery case.

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

Checking battery fluid
NOTICE
z Be sure the engine and all accessories are off before performing maintenance.
z When checking the battery, remove
the ground cable from the negative
terminal (−" mark) first and reinstall it last.

Battery recharging precautions
During recharging, the battery is producing hydrogen gas.

Type A
Green

Dark

Clear or
light yellow

Therefore, before recharging:
1. If recharging with the battery installed
on the vehicle, be sure to disconnect
the ground cable.

Type B
Blue

White

2. Be sure the power switch on the recharger is off when connecting the
charger cables to the battery and when
disconnecting them.

Red

z Be careful not to cause a short circuit with tools.
z Take care no solution gets into the
battery when washing it.

CAUTION

Always charge the battery in an un-

CHECKING BY HYDROMETER
Check the battery
hydrometer color.
Hydrometer color

condition

the

Condition

Type A

Type B

Green

Blue

Good

Dark

White

Charging necessary.
Have battery
checked by your
Toyota dealer.

Clear or
light
yellow

Red

confined area. Do not charge the
battery in a garage or closed room
where there is not sufficient ventilation.

Only do a slow charge (5 A or
less). Charging at a quicker rate is
dangerous. The battery may explode, causing personal injuries.

Have battery
checked by your
Toyota dealer.

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

259

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

Checking and replacing fuses
NOTICE
Never recharge the battery while the
engine is running. Also, be sure all
accessories are turned off.

Type A

Good

Blown

Type B

If the headlights or other electrical
components do not work, check the
fuses. If any of the fuses are blown,
they must be replaced.
Good

Blown

Type C

See Fuse locations" in Section 7−1 for
locations of the fuses.
Turn the ignition switch and inoperative
component off. Pull a suspected fuse
straight out and check it.

Good

260

Blown

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

Determine which fuse may be causing the
problem. The lid of the fuse box shows
the name of the circuit for each fuse. See
Section 8 of this manual for the functions
controlled by each circuit.

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

Adding washer fluid
Type A fuses can be pulled out by using
the pull−out tool. The location of the pull−
out tool is shown in the illustration.
If you are not sure whether the fuse has
blown, try replacing the suspected fuse
with one that you know is good.
If the fuse has blown, push a new fuse
into the clip.
Only install a fuse with the amperage rating designated on the fuse box lid.

If the new fuse immediately blows out,
there is a problem with the electrical system. Have your Toyota dealer correct it as
soon as possible.

CAUTION
Never use a fuse with a higher amperage rating, or any other object, in
place of a fuse. This may cause extensive damage and possibly a fire.

If you do not have a spare fuse, in an
emergency you can pull out the PWR
OUTLET" or A.C" fuse, which may be
dispensable for normal driving, and use it
if its amperage rating is the same.

If any washer does not work, the washer tank may be empty. Add washer
fluid.
You may use plain water as washer fluid.
However, in cold areas where temperatures range below freezing point, use
washer fluid containing antifreeze. This
product is available at your Toyota dealer
and most auto parts stores. Follow the
manufacturer’s directions for how much to
mix with water.

NOTICE
Do not use engine antifreeze or any
other substitute because it may damage your vehicle’s paint.

If you cannot use one of the same amperage, use one that is lower, but as close
as possible to the rating. If the amperage
is lower than that specified, the fuse
might blow out again but this does not
indicate anything wrong. Be sure to get
the correct fuse as soon as possible and
return the substitute to its original clip.
It is a good idea to purchase a set of
spare fuses and keep them in your vehicle for emergencies.

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

261

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

Replacing light bulbs
The following illustrations show how to
gain access to the bulbs. When replacing
a bulb, make sure the ignition switch and
light switch are off. Use bulbs with the
wattage ratings given in the table.

CAUTION
Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas
inside and require special handling.
They can burst or shatter if scratched
or dropped. Hold a bulb only by its
plastic or metal case. Do not touch
the glass part of a bulb with bare
hands.

The inside of the lens of exterior lights
such as headlights may temporarily fog up
when the lens becomes wet in the rain or
in a car wash. This is not a problem
because the fogging is caused by the
temperature difference between the outside
and inside of the lens, just like the
windshield fogged up in the rain. However,
if there is a large drop of water on the
inside of the lens, or if there is water
pooled inside the light, contact your
Toyota dealer.

Bulb
No.

Type

Headlights

60/55

Front fog lights

Parking and front
side marker lights

Front turn signal
lights

Rear turn signal
lights

Stop/tail lights

21/5

Back−up lights

License plate light

921

Interior light

Personal lights

Glove box light

1.4

Luggage
compartment light

Light bulbs

High mounted
stoplight

NOTICE
Only use a bulb of the listed type.

A:
B:
C:
D:
E:

262

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

HB2 halogen bulbs
H3 halogen bulbs
Wedge base bulbs (clear)
Wedge base bulbs (amber)
Double end bulbs

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

Headlights

1. Open the hood. Unplug the connector. Remove the rubber cover.
If the connector is tight, wiggle it.

2. Release the bulb retaining spring
and remove the bulb. Install a new
bulb and the bulb retaining spring.

3. Install the rubber cover with the
TOP" mark upward, and snuggle on
the boss. Insert the connector.

To install a bulb, align the tabs of the
bulb with the cutouts of the mounting
hole.

Make sure the rubber cover fits snugly on
the connector and the headlight body.

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

Aiming is not necessary after replacing
the bulb. When aiming adjustment is necessary, contact your Toyota dealer.

263

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

Front fog lights

1. Loosen the cover retaining screws
and remove the cover.

2. Lift up the soft casing and disconnect the cords.

3. Release the bulb retaining spring
and remove the bulb. Install a new
bulb and the bulb retaining spring.
To install the bulb, align the cutouts of the
bulb with the protrusions of the mounting
hole.

264

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

Parking and front side
marker lights

4. Connect the cord and put the soft
casing into the cover.

5. Install the cover with the retaining
screws.

Use a Phillips−head screwdriver.

Aiming is not necessary after replacing
the bulb. When aiming adjustment is necessary, contact your Toyota dealer.

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

265

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

Front turn signal lights

Rear turn signal, stop/tail,
and back−up lights

Use a Phillips−head screwdriver.

266

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

a: Back−up light
b: Rear turn signal lights
c: Stop/tail light

License plate lights

High mounted stoplight

Use a Phillips−head screwdriver.

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

267

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

268

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

SECTION

SPECIFICATIONS
Dimensions and weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Service specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

270
270
271
271
274
274

269

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

Dimensions and weight

Engine
mm (in.)
P265/70R 16 tire

P225/75R 15 tire

Overall length

4655(183.3)

Without wheel
opening extension
4655(183.3)

With wheel
opening extension
4655(183.3)

Overall width

1690(66.5)

1730(68.1)

1800(70.9)

Overall height

1715(67.5)∗

1740(68.5)∗

Wheelbase

2675(105.3)

Front tread

1505(59.3)

Rear tread

1495(58.9)

1510(59.5)

Cargo weight rating kg (lb.):
113(250)
∗:

Unladen vehicle

270

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

Model: 5VZ−FE
Type:
6 cylinder V type 4 cycle, gasoline
Bore and stroke, mm (in.):
93.5

82.0(3.68

Displacement,
3378(206.1)

cm3

3.23)

(cu. in.):

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

Fuel

Service specifications

Fuel type:
Unleaded gasoline, Octane Rating 87
(Research Octane Number 91) or higher

ENGINE

Fuel tank capacity, L (gal., Imp. gal.):
70(18.5,15.4)

Oil grade:

Valve clearance (engine cold), mm (in.):
Intake
Exhaust

0.130.23(0.0060.009)
0.270.37(0.0110.014)

Recommended oil viscosity (SAE):

Spark plug type:
DENSO
NGK

API grade SJ, Energy−Conserving" or
ILSAC multigrade engine oil is recommended.

K16TR11
BKR5EKB−11

Spark plug gap, mm (in.):

5W-30 Preferred

1.1(0.043)
Drive belt tension measured with Borroughs drive belt tension gauge No.
BT−33−73F (used belt), Ibf:
Generator belt
100"20
Air conditioning compressor belt
100"20
Power steering pump belt
100 +20
−15

Temperature range anticipated before
next oil change

ENGINE LUBRICATION
Oil capacity (drain and refill),
L (qt., Imp. qt.):
With filter
Without filter

5.2(5.5,4.6)
4.9(5.2,4.3)

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

271

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

COOLING SYSTEM

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

DIFFERENTIAL

Total capacity, L (qt., Imp. qt.):

Fluid capacity (drain and refill),
L (qt., Imp. qt.):

Oil capacity, L (qt., Imp. qt.):

With rear heater
Without rear heater

9.0(9.5,7.9)
8.0(8.5,7.0)

Coolant type:
TOYOTA Long Life Coolant" or equivalent

Fluid type:
Automatic transmission fluid
DEXRONIII (DEXRONII)

Do not use alcohol type antifreeze or
plain water alone.

TRANSFER

voltage∗

Open
at 20C (68F):
12.612.8 V
Fully charged
12.212.4 V
Half charged
11.812.0 V
Discharged
∗:

Four−wheel drive models
Up to 2.0(2.1,1.8)

With ethylene−glycol type coolant for a
proper corrosion protection of aluminum
components

BATTERY

Oil capacity, L (qt., Imp. qt.):
1.2(1.3,1.1)
Oil type:
Gear oil API GL−4 or GL−5
Recommended oil viscosity:
SAE 75W−90

Voltage that is checked 20 minutes after the key is removed with all the
lights turned off

D−II

Four−wheel drive models
Front
1.15(1.2,1.0)
Rear
With center differential lock system
2.75(2.9,2.4)
Without center differential lock system
2.45(2.6,2.2)
Oil type:
Hypoid gear oil API GL−5
Recommended oil viscosity:
Front
SAE 75W−90
Rear
Above
SAE
Below
SAE

Charging rates:
5 A max.

272

Two−wheel drive models
2.75(2.9,2.4)

Two−wheel drive models
Up to 1.6(1.7,1.4)

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

−18C (0F)
90
−18C (0F)
80W or 80W−90

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

CHASSIS LUBRICATION

STEERING

Propeller shafts:
Spiders
Lithium base chassis grease, NLGI
No.2

Wheel free play:
Less than 30 mm (1.2 in.)

Slide yoke and double cardan joint
Molybdenum−disulfide
lithium
base
chassis grease, NLGI No.2

Power steering fluid type:
Automatic transmission fluid DEXRONII
or III

BRAKES
Minimum pedal clearance when depressed
with the force of 490 N (50 kgf, 110 lbf)
with the engine running, mm (in.):
40(1.6)
Pedal free play, mm (in.):
16(0.040.24)
Pad wear limit, mm (in.):
1.0(0.04)
Lining wear limit, mm (in.):
1.0(0.04)
Parking brake adjustment when pulled with
the force of 196 N (20 kgf, 44 lbf):
79 clicks
Fluid type:
SAE J1703 or FMVSS No.116 DOT 3

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

273

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

Tires

Fuses

Tire size, pressure and wheel size:
Tire pressure
kPa (kgf/cm2 or bar, psi)
Tire size

Wheel size
Front

Rear

P265/70R16

220(2.2,32)

7J 16∗1
7JJ 16∗2

P225/75R15

200(2.0,29)

7J 15∗1
7JJ 15∗2

NOTE: For a complete information on tires (e.g. replacing tires or replacing
wheels), see Checking tire pressure" through Aluminum wheel precautions"
in Section 7−2.
Wheel nut torque, N⋅m (kgf⋅m, ft⋅lbf):
110(11.5,83)

Engine compartment
(without daytime running light system)

Fuses (type A)
1. ALT−S 7.5 A: Charging system

∗1 :

Vehicles with steel wheels
∗2 : Vehicles with aluminum wheels

2. PWR OUTLET 15 A: Power outlets
3. RR HTR 10 A: Rear air conditioning
system
4. MPX−B 15 A: Power back window,
back door lock, back window wiper,
open door warning (back door), power
door lock control system, back window
defogger, horns, theft deterrent system

274

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

17. HEAD (HI LH) 10 A: Left−hand headlight (high beam)
18. HEAD (LO RH) 10
headlight (low beam)

Right−hand

19. HEAD (LO LH) 10 A: Left−hand headlight (low beam)
20. TOWING 25 A: Trailer lights (back−up
lights, rear turn signal lights, stop/tail
lights)
21. SEAT HTR 20 A: Seat heater
22. FOG 15 A: Front fog lights
Engine compartment
(with daytime running light system)

5. DOME 15 A: Interior lights, personal
lights,
luggage
compartment
light,
clock, car audio system, gauges and
meters, ignition switch light, vanity mirror light, daytime running light
6. OBD 7.5 A: On−board diagnosis system

Instrument panel

10. TAIL 10 A: Tail lights, license plate
lights, instrument panel lights
11. A.C 10 A: Air conditioning system
12. MIR HTR 10 A: Outside rear view mirror heaters
13. DEFOG 15 A: Back window defogger

7. EFI 20 A: Multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection
system

14. ETCS 15 A: Multiport fuel injection
system/sequential multiport fuel injection system

8. HEAD(RH) 10 A: Right−hand headlight,
gauges and meters

15. DRL 7.5 A: Daytime running light system

9. HEAD(LH) 10 A: Left−hand headlight

16. HEAD (HI RH) 10 A: Right−hand headlight (high beam), gauges and meters
2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

23. ECU−IG 10 A: Cruise control system,
anti−lock brake system, vehicle skid
control system, SRS airbag system,
electronically
controlled
automatic
transmission system, power antenna,
power window, electric moon roof, power back window, back window defogger,
back window wiper
24. TURN 10 A: Turn signals lights, emergency flashers
25. WIPER 25 A: Windshield wipers and
washer, power door lock control system, back window defogger, horns,
theft deterrent system
26. 4WD 20 A: A.D.D. control system,
four−wheel drive control system, center
differential lock system

275

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

27. ACC 15 A: Car audio system, power
antenna, clock, power rear view mirror
control, cigarette lighter, seat belt pretensioners, electronically controlled automatic transmission system, power
outlets, theft deterrent system
28. GAUGE 10 A: Gauges and meters,
back window defogger, daytime running
light system, air conditioning system,
cruise control system, center differential lock system, electronically controlled automatic transmission, back−up
lights
29. IGN 10 A: SRS airbag system, seat
belt pretensioners, multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection system, discharge warning light,
vehicle skid control system

Fuses (type B)
34. HEATER 50 A: Air conditioning system,
all components in A.C" fuse
35. AM1 40 A: Starting system, all components in ACC", GAUGE", TURN",
ECU−IG", WIPER" and 4WD" fuses
36. J/B 50 A: All components in POWER",
HORN,HAZ", STOP" and ECU−B"
fuses
37. AM2 30 A: Starting system, multiport
fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection system, all components in STA" and IGN" fuses
38. ABS2 40 A: Anti−lock brake system,
active traction control system, vehicle
skid control system

30. ECU−B 7.5 A: Gauges and meters, air
conditioning system

39. POWER 30 A: Power window, power
back window, electric moon roof, power
seat, back door lock

31. HORN,HAZ 15 A: Horns, emergency
flashers

40. ABS 60 A: Anti−lock brake system

32. STA 7.5 A: Starting system
33. STOP 10 A: Stop lights, high−mounted
stoplight

276

Fuses (type C)
41. ALT 120 A: Charging system, all components in AM1", HEATER", TAIL",
RR HTR", ALT−S", DEFOG", MIR
HTR" and ACC" fuses

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

SECTION

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS FOR U.S.
OWNERS AND UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY
GRADING
Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Uniform tire quality grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

277

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

Reporting safety defects
for U.S. owners
If you believe that your vehicle
has a defect which could cause a
crash or could cause injury or
death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA) in
addition to notifying Toyota Motor
Sales, U.S.A., Inc.
(Toll−free: 1−800−331−4331).
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety
defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and
remedy
campaign.
However,
NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between
you, your dealer, or Toyota Motor
Sales, U.S.A., Inc.

278

Uniform tire quality grading
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline
toll−free at 1−800−424−9393 (or
366−0123 in Washington, D.C.
area) or write to: NHTSA, U.S.
Department of Transportation,
Washington, D.C. 20590. You can
also obtain other information about
motor vehicle safety from the Hotline.

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

This information has been prepared in accordance with regulations issued by the
National Highway Traffic Safety Administration of the U.S. Department of Transportation. It provides the purchasers and/
or prospective purchasers of Toyota
vehicles with information on uniform tire
quality grading.
Your Toyota dealer will help answer any
questions you may have as you read this
information.
DOT quality gradesAll passenger car
tires must conform to Federal Safety
Requirements in addition to these
grades. Quality grades can be found
where applicable on the tire sidewall
between tread shoulder and maximum
section width. For example: Treadwear
200 Traction AA Temperature A

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

TreadwearThe treadwear grade is a
comparative rating based on the wear rate
of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test
course. For example, a tire graded 150
would wear one and a half (1−1/2) times
as well on the government course as a
tire graded 100. The relative performance
of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to
variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.
Traction AA, A, B, CThe traction
grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A,
B, and C, and they represent the tire’s
ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt
and concrete. A tire marked C may have
poor traction performance.
Warning: The traction grade assigned to
this tire is based on braking (straight
ahead) traction tests and does not include
cornering (turning) traction.

Temperature A, B, CThe temperature
grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature
can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire
failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car
tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No.109. Grades B
and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than
the minimum required by law.
Warning: The temperature grades for this
tire are established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive
loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible
tire failure.

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

279

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

280

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

U −5
Quick index
If a service reminder indicator or warning buzzer comes on . . . . . . . . . . 94
If your vehicle will not start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
If your engine stalls while driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
If your vehicle overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
If you have a flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
If your vehicle needs to be towed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Tips for driving during break−in period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
How to start the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Complete index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NO TAG

Gas station information
Fuel type:
UNLEADED gasoline, Octane Rating 87 (Research Octane Number 91)
or higher
See page 191 for detailed information.
Fuel tank capacity:
70 L (18.5 gal., 15.4 lmp. gal.)
Engine oil:
API grade SJ, Energy−Conserving" or ILSAC multigrade engine oil is
recommended.
See page 2 for detailed information.
Tire information: See pages 6 through 11.
Tire pressure: See page 274.

Publication No. OM35768U
Part No. 01999-35768
Printed in Japan 01−0008−00
2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

(

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

You should know as much about the quality and
importance of proper maintenance of your new
vehicle as the people who built it.
The Toyota authorized Repair Manual
tells you how to maintain your vehicle and
enables you to correctly perform your own
maintenance.
The best way to keep your new vehicle in top
running order is to maintain it properly from
the moment you drive it off the showroom
floor.
The Toyota authorized Repair Manual is
packed with literally everything you need to
know to perform your own maintenance in
virtually every area of your new vehicle.

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

’01 4Runner_U (L/O 0008)

Maintenance procedures for the engine,
chassis, body, electrical system, and more,
are clearly explained and illustrated.
Periodic maintenance and tune−up
Periodic maintenance and tune−up helps to prevent small problems from growing into larger ones later on. The repair manual outlines exactly what maintenance is required and clearly explains how to do the
work yourself step−by−step.
Areas covered include such things as spark plug replacement, valve clearance adjustment and engine oil
and filter replacement.

Where to obtain the
Repair Manual
The repair manual for 4Runner, written in English, may be purchased as applicable from any
Toyota dealer.
Pub. Name: 2001 4Runner Repair Manual
Pub. No.: RM796U1 (Maintenance, Preparation,
Service specifications and Diagnostics)
RM796U2 (Engine, Chassis and Body)

2001 4RUNNER (OM35768U)

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.6
Linearized                      : No
Has XFA                         : No
XMP Toolkit                     : Adobe XMP Core 5.6-c015 84.159810, 2016/09/10-02:41:30
Modify Date                     : 2017:05:19 15:24:13-07:00
Create Date                     : 2017:05:19 15:24:13-07:00
Metadata Date                   : 2017:05:19 15:24:13-07:00
Format                          : application/pdf
Document ID                     : uuid:7a67e42e-b870-429d-aef1-73ec860a2191
Instance ID                     : uuid:9b6d551e-d928-4577-a500-93097c9e5771
Page Count                      : 301

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

OM35768U

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation